2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M - General … Systems ..... 135 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 139 Mirrors ..... 175 ... 2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 20Safety Belts ............................................ 22Child Restraints ...................................... 46Airbag System ........................................ 89Restraint System Check ....................... 112

Features and Controls .............................. 115Keys ..................................................... 117Doors and Locks .................................. 125Windows ............................................... 131Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 135Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 139Mirrors .................................................. 175OnStar® System ................................... 185Universal Home Remote System .......... 188Storage Areas ...................................... 201Sunroof ................................................ 205

Instrument Panel ....................................... 209Instrument Panel Overview ................... 212Climate Controls ................................... 240Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 252Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 273Audio System(s) ................................... 306

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 377Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 378Towing ................................................. 443

Service and Appearance Care .................. 491Service ................................................. 494Fuel ...................................................... 496Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 504Rear Axle ............................................. 546Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 548Front Axle ............................................ 550Noise Control System ........................... 551

2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

1

Bulb Replacement ................................ 552Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 557Tires ..................................................... 558Appearance Care .................................. 607Vehicle Identification ............................. 616Electrical System .................................. 617Capacities and Specifications ................ 626

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 629Maintenance Schedule .......................... 630

Customer Assistance Information ............. 651Customer Assistance and Information ... 652Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 667Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 670

Index .......................................................... 673

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thenames SILVERADO and Z71 are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quickreference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25817255 A Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,refer to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement foradditional and specific information on this engine.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. A box with the word CAUTION is used totell about things that could hurt you or others if youwere to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do tohelp avoid or reduce the hazard. Please readthese cautions. If you do not, you or others couldbe hurt.

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do Notdo this” or “Do Not letthis happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsYou will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something thatcould damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoidthe damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehiclewhich use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Lumbar ............................................. 11Heated Seats .............................................. 12Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 13Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15Head Restraints .......................................... 18Seatback Latches ........................................ 19Center Seat ................................................ 19

Rear Seats .................................................... 20Rear Seat Operation (Full Bench) ............... 20Rear Seat Operation (Split Bench) .............. 21

Safety Belts .................................................. 22Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 22Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 27Driver Position ............................................. 28Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 35Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 36Right Front Passenger Position ................... 37

Center Front Passenger Position(Regular Cab) .......................................... 37

Center Front Passenger Position(Crew and Extended Cab) ....................... 38

Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 39Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 42Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 45Safety Belt Extender ................................... 45

Child Restraints ............................................ 46Older Children ............................................. 46Infants and Young Children ......................... 49Child Restraint Systems .............................. 53Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 58Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 60Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 72Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position .................................. 74Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position(With Airbag Off Switch) .......................... 75

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position (With PassengerSensing System) ...................................... 81

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position (Heavy DutyCrew Cab Only) ....................................... 85

Airbag System .............................................. 89Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 92When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 95What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 97How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 98

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates? ................................................... 98

Airbag Off Switch ...................................... 100Passenger Sensing System ....................... 103Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 110Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 111Restraint System Check ............................. 112

Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 112Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................. 113

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward or rearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to thedesired position andrelease the bar.

Try to move the seat with your body to be surethe seat is locked in place.

9

Power Seats

On a vehicle with power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushionby moving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushionby moving the rear of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

On seats with power reclining seatbacks, thecontrol is located behind the power seat control onthe outboard side of the seats. See “PowerReclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbackson page 15.

A vehicle with a memory function allows seatsettings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 formore information.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

10

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is locatedon the front of the driver seat lower cushion onthe outboard side. Turn the knob forward toincrease, and rearward to decrease lumbarsupport.

Power Lumbar

If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used tooperate this feature are located on the outboardside of the seats.• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the

front of the control.• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold

the rear of the control.• To raise the height of the lumbar support,

press and hold the top of the control.• To lower the height of the lumbar support,

press and hold the bottom of the control.

11

Release the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbar support.

Your vehicle may have a memory function whichallows seat settings to be saved and recalled.See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13for more information.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles withheated front seats, thecontrols are locatedon the driver’s andpassenger’s doors,near the door handle.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicatethat the feature is working. Press the buttonto cycle through the temperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn the heat to theseatback off. Indicator lights below the button showthe level of heat selected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate thatthe feature is working. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.Indicator lights above the button will show the levelof heat selected: three for high, two for medium,and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If you want touse the heated seat feature after you restart yourvehicle, you will need to press the appropriateheated seat or seatback button again.

12

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and PedalsYour vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for thisfeature are located onthe driver’s doorpanel, and are used toprogram and recallmemory settings for thedriver’s seat, outsidemirrors, and theadjustable throttle andbrake pedal.

To save your positions in memory, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, andthe throttle and brake pedals to a comfortableposition.See Outside Power Mirrors on page 181and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedalon page 143 for more information.

Not all mirrors will have the ability to saveand recall their positions.Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedalswill have the ability to save and recall theirpositions.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beepsare heard indicating that the position hasbeen stored.

A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brakepedal position can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must bein PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 orbutton 2 corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat, outside mirrors, and adjustablethrottle and brake pedals will move to the positionpreviously stored. You will hear a single beep.

If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter toenter your vehicle and the remote recall memoryfeature is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror,and adjustable pedal movements will occur.See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295for more information.

13

To stop recall movement of the memory functionat any time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, power mirror buttons, oradjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/orthe adjustable pedals while recalling a memoryposition, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustablepedals recall may stop working. If this happens,remove the obstruction and press the appropriatecontrol for the area that is not responding fortwo seconds. Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exitposition can be recalled by pressing the exitbutton. You will hear a single beep, and thedriver’s seat will move back.

If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in theDriver Information Center (DIC), automaticseat movement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 295 for more information.

The memory seat and easy exit features can alsobe programmed using the DIC.

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295.

14

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks,the lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat(s).

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

15

To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, thecontrol used to recline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat behind the power seatcontrol.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of thecontrol rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top ofthe control forward.

16

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

17

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the releasebutton, located on thetop of the seatback,while you push the headrestraint down.

The second row seats have head rests that canbe adjusted up and down.

18

Seatback LatchesThe front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access tothe rear of the cab.

To tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever locatedon the outboard side of the seat cushion.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback rearward until it latches.After returning the seatback to its upright position,push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Center SeatYour vehicle may have a front center seat.The seatback doubles as an armrest andcupholder/storage area for the driver andpassenger when the center seat is not used.Do not use it as a seating position whenthe seatback is folded down.

For information on safety belts for this position,see Center Front Passenger Position (RegularCab) on page 37 or Center Front PassengerPosition (Crew and Extended Cab) on page 38.

19

Rear SeatsRear Seat Operation (Full Bench)

Folding the Rear SeatTo fold the seat up, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Pull up on the frontof the seat cushionwhile pullingdown on the releasestrap, locatedunder the seatcushion.

2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches withthe seatback.

3. After latching the seat cushion up, pullforward on it to make sure it is locked.

To fold the seat down, do the following:

1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pullingthe release strap, located under the seatcushion. Pull the seat cushion down untilit latches.

2. After latching the seat cushion, pull up on it tomake sure it is locked.

20

Rear Seat Operation (Split Bench)

Folding Rear SeatOn a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seateither side of the rear seat may be folded foradded cargo space.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

Make sure that nothing is on the seat.

To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up.

To return the seat to the normal seating position,slowly pull the seat cushion down.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

Make sure that the safety belt buckles on thedriver’s side seatback are accessible to theoutboard and center occupant and are not underthe seat cushions.

21

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.This includes riding on the tailgate, evenwhen the vehicle is operated at lowspeeds. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. People riding on thetailgate can easily lose their balance andfall in response to vehicle maneuvers.Falling from a moving vehicle may resultin serious injuries or death.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Do not allow people to ride in, or on, anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

22

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 255and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light(1500 Series) on page 255.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash.If you do have a crash, you do not know if itwill be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between.In many of them, people who buckle up cansurvive and sometimes walk away. Without beltsthey could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

23

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

24

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

25

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

26

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 46 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 49. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

27

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 45.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 35.

28

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

29

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

30


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

31


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

32


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

33


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

34

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentShoulder belt height adjusters are available for thedriver and right front passenger seating positions.Before you begin to drive, move the shoulderbelt adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move the adjusterdown for the regularand crew cabs, squeezethe buttons (A) on thesides of the heightadjuster and move theheight adjuster tothe desired position.

Regular and Crew Cab

35

On the extended cabs,push down on therelease button (A)and move the heightadjuster to thedesired position.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After you move the adjuster to where you want it,try to move it down, without squeezing thebuttons for the regular and crew cabs, or withoutpushing the release button for extended cabs,to make sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

Extended Cab

36

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 28.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

Center Front Passenger Position(Regular Cab)To learn how to wear the center front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 28.

The center front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

37

Center Front Passenger Position(Crew and Extended Cab)

Lap BeltYour vehicle may have a center front seatingposition.

When you sit in a center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position, and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 45.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

38

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

39

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 45.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

40

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strongpelvic bones. And you would be less likely toslide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor a crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

41

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage clip onthe interior body.

42

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

43

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 39. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guides. Slide the guide onto thestorage clip.

44

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioner activation are met.And, if your vehicle has side impact rolloverairbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or a rolloverevent.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 113.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

45

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

46

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 42. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safetybelt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide.

47

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

48

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection!This includes infants and all other children.Neither the distance traveled nor the age and sizeof the traveler changes the need, for everyone,to use safety restraints. In fact, the law inevery state in the United States and in everyCanadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

49

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

50

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

51

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints,there are many different models available.When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

52

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

53

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

54

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

55

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle.Child restraint systems must be secured invehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion ofa lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 60 for more information.A child can be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

56

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place ofhip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are attached to a flat pad whichrests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attachedto a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

57

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem or airbag off switch are designed toturn off the passenger’s frontal airbagunder certain conditions, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.


58


We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles witha rear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

If you secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing child restraints notbe transported in your vehicle, even if the airbagis off.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

There is limited space in the rear seating area ofan extended cab model. If you want to securea child restraint in a rear seating position ofan extended cab model, especially in the rearcenter position, be sure to study the instructionsthat came with your child restraint to see if thereis enough room to secure your seat properly.

59

If your vehicle has the passenger sensing systemor the airbag off switch and you need to securea rear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat, the passenger’s frontal airbagmust be off. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 103, Airbag Off Switch on page 100, andSecuring a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 75or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position (With Passenger Sensing System)on page 81 or Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty CrewCab Only) on page 85 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

60

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturerwill provide you with instructions on how touse the child restraint and its attachments.The following explains how to attach a childrestraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

61

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In theUnited States, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

62

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

Do not install a child restraint in the center frontseat position. See Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position on page 74 for moreinformation.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

For crew and extended cab models, the rearoutboard seating positions have exposed metallower anchors located in the crease betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion.

Regular Cab Front Seat

Crew and Extended CabRear Seat

63

For regular cab models,there is an anchorsymbol on thetrim covers to assist youin locating the toptether anchors.

Do not install a child restraint in the center seatposition. See Securing a Child Restraint inthe Center Front Seat Position on page 74 formore information. For regular cab models, the toptether anchors are located under trim coverson the back panel behind the passenger seat.Remove the trim plug to access the anchor.

Regular Cab

64

For crew and extended cab models, the top tetheranchors are the loops located near the top ofthe seatback for each rear seating position.These loops will be used to route the top tetherthrough, as well as, to secure the top tether in thevehicle. Be sure to use an anchor (loop) locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Be sure to read the instructions following toproperly install a child restraint using these loops.

Do not secure a child restraint in the frontpassenger’s position if your vehicle has rear seats,if a national or local law requires that the toptether be attached, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tethermust be attached. There is no place to attach thetop tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 58for additional information.

Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab Similar

65

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor, except the centertop tether anchors in crew and extendedcab models, and lower anchors in thevehicle are designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

66

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

67

Regular Cab Models

1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if your vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forwardby pulling the recliner handle upwardto access the top tether anchor.See Reclining Seatbacks on page 15for additional information.

1.2. Find the top tether anchor.1.3. Remove the trim cover to expose

the anchor.

1.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise the headrestraint and routethe tether underthe head restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

68

2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) onpage 75 or Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position (With PassengerSensing System) on page 81 or Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position(Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) on page 85 forinstructions on installing the child restraintusing the safety belts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Crew and Extended Cab Models1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to

the lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

69

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tetheranchor (loop), if your vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. When using a child restraint with a toptether in the rear driver side position:A. Raise the head rest.B. Route the top tether (B) between

the head rest posts, through theloop (A), behind the inboardhead rest post, and under thecenter shoulder belt (C).

C. Attach the top tether (B) to the toptether anchor (loop) (D) at thecenter rear seating position.

Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position

Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position

70

2.2. When using a child restraint with a toptether in the rear center position:A. Route the top tether (B) through

the center loop (D), and behindthe inboard passenger sidehead rest post.

B. Attach the top tether (B) to the toptether anchor (loop) at the rearpassenger side seating position.

2.3. When using a child restraint with a toptether in the rear passenger position:A. Raise the head rest.B. Route the top tether (B) between the

head rest posts, through the loop onthe passenger side and behind theinboard head rest post.

C. Attach the top tether (B) to the toptether anchor (loop) (D) at thecenter rear seating position.

2.4. Tighten the top tether when andas the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.When the top tether is tightened, theanchor (loop) may bend. This is normaland will not damage the vehicle.


71

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat Position

Extended Cab and Crew CabThere is limited space in the rear seating of anextended cab model. If you want to secure a childrestraint in a rear seating position, be sure tostudy the instructions that came with your childrestraint to see if there is enough room to secureyour seat properly.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 60.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child in the childrestraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

72

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

73

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 60.

7. Push and pull the restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in this position.

74

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position(With Airbag Off Switch)Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 58.

If one of the switches pictured in the followingillustrations is located in your glove box, yourvehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you canuse to manually turn on or off the right frontpassenger’s airbag.

Your switch may vary slightly. See Airbag OffSwitch on page 100 for more on this, includingimportant safety information and illustrationsof alternate switch designs.

United States Canada

75


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure to turn off theairbag before using a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position.



Even though the airbag off switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’sairbag, no system is fail safe, andno one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


76

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comeson when you have turned off the airbag, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 100 and Airbag Readiness Light onpage 256 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,we recommend that rear-facing child restraintsnot be transported in your vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.


If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no toptether anchor at the right front seating position.Do not secure a child seat in this position if anational or local law requires that the top tether beanchored or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that the top tether must beanchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 60 if the child restrainthas a top tether.

77

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.We recommend that rear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the airbag off switch has turned off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, theoff indicator in the overhead console shouldlight and stay lit when you start the vehicleand after the system check is completed.See Airbag Off Light on page 256.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.


78


6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder belt to tighten thelap belt portion, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. If you are usinga forward-facing child restraint, you may find ithelpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.You should not be able to pull more of thebelt out of the retractor once the lock hasbeen set.

79

7. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, and theposition you are using has a top tether anchor,attach and tighten the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 60.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch toturn on the right front passenger’s airbag whenyou remove the child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sitting thereis a member of the passenger airbag risk group.See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not ina risk group identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the passenger’s airbagunless the person sitting there is in a riskgroup. See Airbag Off Switch on page 100for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

80

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position(With Passenger Sensing System)Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 58.

In addition, your vehicle may have a passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 103 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 258 formore information on this, including importantsafety information.


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in arear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

81

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,we recommend that rear-facing child restraintsnot be transported in your vehicle, even if theairbag is off.


If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no toptether anchor at the right front seating position.Do not secure a child seat in this position ifa national or local law requires that the top tetherbe anchored or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 60 if the childrestraint has a top tether.


Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 103. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 258.



82



83

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

7. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, and theposition you are using has a top tether anchor,attach and tighten the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 60.


If your vehicle has the passenger sensing systemand the airbag is off, the off indicator will be litand stay lit when you start the vehicle.

84

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position(Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only)Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. If you need tosecure a forward-facing child restraint in the rightfront seat position, see Where to Put theRestraint on page 58.


85

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger’s seat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Always secure arear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.


There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 60 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.


Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even if theairbag is off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.



86



87

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

88

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

Your vehicle may have the following airbags:

• A roof-mounted rollover airbag for the driverand right front passenger.

• A roof-mounted rollover airbag for the secondrow outboard passenger positions.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags,the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbagcovering on the headliner above the sidewall trimnear the driver’s and right front passenger’swindow and the rear passenger’s outboard seatingpositions.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

89

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.



Roof-mounted rollover airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle, during a vehicle rollover,or in a severe frontal impact. They are notdesigned to inflate in rear crashes. If yourvehicle has roof-mounted airbags, theyare designed to provide both side impactprotection and rollover protection.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

90

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted side impactairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 46 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 49.

91

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 256 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

92

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbagfor the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is located in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

93

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbagfor the right front passenger and the persondirectly behind that passenger, it is located in theceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything betweenan occupant and an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering. And, if your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of your vehicleby routing the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, the pathof an inflating side impact airbag will beblocked. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear.

94

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But theyare designed to inflate only if the impact exceedsa predetermined deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds take into account a varietyof desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflateand help restrain the occupants. Whetheryour frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit, the directionof the impact, and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a differentcrash speed than if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

95

Your vehicle has a seat position sensor whichenables the sensing system to monitor thefore and aft position of the driver’s seat. Seatposition sensors provide information that is usedto determine if the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedrollover airbags and a rollover sensor. SeeAirbag System on page 89. These “rollovercapable” airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes, during a rollover,or in a severe frontal impact. A roof-mountedrollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed “threshold level.”The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Roof-mounted airbags are not intendedto inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-mountedrollover airbags will deploy when either side ofthe vehicle is struck, during a rollover, or ina severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows

down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags, inflationis determined by the location and severity ofthe impact or a rollover event.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 394 for tips onoff-road driving.

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ofyour vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, yourvehicle has single stage airbags. If the GVWRis below 8,500 lb (3 855 kg), your vehicle has dualstage airbags. You can find the GVWR on thecertification label on the rear edge of the driver’sdoor. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428for more information.

Single Stage AirbagsIf your vehicle has frontal airbags with single stagedeployment and your vehicle goes straight intoa wall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.

96

Dual Stage Airbags

If your vehicle has frontal airbags with dual stagedeployment, the amount of restraint will adjustaccording to crash severity. Your vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors which help the sensingsystem distinguish between a moderate and amore severe frontal impact. For moderate frontalimpacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 18 to 23 mph (29 to 37 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range. Vehicle’s with dualstage airbags also have a sensor which enablesthe sensing system to monitor the position ofthe driver seat. The seat position sensor providesinformation which is used to determine if theairbags should deploy at a reduced level or atfull deployment.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. In the case of a roof-mounted rolloverairbag, the sensing system detects that thevehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severefrontal impact or a moderate to severe sideimpact. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.

The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are allpart of the airbag modules inside the steeringwheel and in the instrument panel in front ofthe right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modulesare located in the ceiling of the vehicle, nearthe side windows.

97

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help youin many types of collisions, including manyfrontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicleswith roof-mounted rollover airbags.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutesafter the vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, and thearea along the ceiling of the vehicle near the sidewindows for vehicles with roof–mounted sideimpact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

98

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and flash the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn off the hazardwarning flashers by using the controls for thosefeatures.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for your airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 670 and Event DataRecorders on page 671.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer for service.

99

Airbag Off SwitchIf one of the switches pictured in the followingillustrations is located in your glove box, yourvehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you canuse to manually turn on or off the right frontpassenger’s airbag. Your switch may vary slightly.

If your vehicle does not have an airbag off switch,it may have a passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System on page 103.

This switch should only be turned to the offposition if the person in the right front passenger’sposition is a member of a passenger risk groupidentified by the national government as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)must ride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• My vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• The infant has a medical condition which,according to the infant’s physician, makesit necessary for the infant to ride in the frontseat so that the driver can constantlymonitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in therear seat(s) whenever possible, childrenages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available in the rearseat(s) of my vehicle; or


100

• The child has a medical condition which,according to the child’s physician, makesit necessary for the child to ride in the frontseat so that the driver can constantly monitorthe child’s condition.

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to hisor her physician:• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a

special risk for the passenger; and

• Makes the potential harm from the passengerairbag in a crash greater than the potentialharm from turning off the airbag and allowingthe passenger, even if belted, to hit thedashboard or windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not ina risk group identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the passenger’s airbagunless the person sitting there is in arisk group.

101

To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag,insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,and move the switch to the off position.

The word OFF or the off symbol will come on inthe passenger airbag status indicator located in theoverhead console to let you know that the rightfront passenger’s airbag is off, after the systemcheck is completed. The airbag off light will comeon and stay on to let you know that the rightfront passenger’s airbag is off. See Airbag Off Lighton page 256.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comeson when you have turned off the airbag,it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 256 for additionalinformation.


102

To turn the right front passenger’s airbag onagain, insert your ignition key into the switch, pushin, and move the switch to the on position.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is nowenabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Lighton page 256 for more information.

Passenger Sensing SystemIf your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured inthe following illustrations, then your vehicle hasa passenger sensing system for the right frontpassenger’s position, unless there is an airbag offswitch located in the glovebox. If there is anairbag off switch, your vehicle does not have apassenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switchon page 100 for more information.

The passenger airbag status indicator will bevisible on the overhead console when you startyour vehicle.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, will be visible during the system check.



103

When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 258.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


104

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deploy



under some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,we recommend that rear-facing child restraintsnot be transported in your vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

105

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 258.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position(With Airbag Off Switch) on page 75 or Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position(With Passenger Sensing System) on page 81 orSecuring a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only)on page 85.

106

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 18.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing the childrestraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.If no rear seat is available, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle, and check with yourdealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

107

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enable theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status. See “SafetyBelts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about the importance ofproper restraint use.

108

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 256 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling orsecuring the child restraint and before a smalloccupant, including a small adult, sits in theright front passenger’s seat. You may want toconsider not using seat covers or other aftermarketequipment. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 111 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect howthe system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

109

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailerand the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 669.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

110

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add to the front

or sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also, theairbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 652.

Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keepthe airbags from working properly?

A: We have designed our airbag systems to workproperly under a wide range of conditions,including snow plowing with vehicles thathave the optional Snow Plow Prep Package(RPO VYU). But do not change or defeat thesnow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do, itcan damage your snow plow and your vehicle,and it may cause an airbag inflation.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, rollover sensor module,steering wheel, instrument panel, overheadconsole, ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillargarnish trim, roof-mounted rollover airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 652.

111

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 610 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the side impact airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows, the airbag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s airbag, orside impact airbag module and ceiling coveringfor roof-mounted rollover airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

112

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage may also mean you may need to haveLATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired orreplaced. New parts and repairs may be necessaryeven if the belt or LATCH system was not beingused at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If an airbag inflates, you may also need to replacethe driver’s and right front passenger’s safetybelt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the newassemblies will be there to help protect you ina collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,even if the airbags have not deployed. Have yoursafety belt pretensioners checked if your vehiclehas been in a collision, or if your airbag readinesslight stays on after you start your vehicle or whileyou are driving. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 256.

113

✍ NOTES

114

Keys ............................................................ 117Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 118Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ............................................... 119Doors and Locks ........................................ 125

Door Locks ................................................ 125Power Door Locks ..................................... 126Delayed Locking ........................................ 126Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 126Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 127Lockout Protection ..................................... 128Rear Doors ............................................... 128Tailgate ..................................................... 129

Windows ...................................................... 131Manual Windows ....................................... 131Power Windows ........................................ 132Power Sliding Rear Window ...................... 134Sun Visors ................................................ 135

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 135Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 135PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 137PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 137

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 139New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 139Ignition Positions ....................................... 140Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 141Starting the Engine .................................... 141Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 143Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 144Active Fuel Management™ ........................ 145Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 146Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 152Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 154Parking Brake ........................................... 169Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 170Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 172Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 172Engine Exhaust ......................................... 173Running the Engine While Parked ............. 174

Section 2 Features and Controls

115

Mirrors ......................................................... 175Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 175Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 175

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................... 178

Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 179Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 180Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 181Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 182

OnStar® System .......................................... 185

Universal Home Remote System ................ 188System Identification .................................. 188Universal Home Remote System ............... 189Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With One Triangular LED) ....... 190Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 194Storage Areas ............................................. 201

Glove Box ................................................. 201Cupholder(s) .............................................. 201Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 202Center Console Storage Area .................... 202Luggage Carrier ........................................ 203Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 204Cargo Management System ...................... 204

Sunroof ....................................................... 205

Section 2 Features and Controls

116

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children. Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the

ignition, all door locks, and the spare tirehoist lock, if your vehicle has one.

117

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer/retailer willbe able to assist you with obtaining replacements.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callthe Roadside Assistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 658.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

118

• Check to determine if battery replacement orresynchronization is necessary. See “BatteryReplacement” and “Resynchronization”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 119.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlockedfrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature you canalso start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.The RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,provides an increased operating range of 195 feet(60 m) away. However, the operating range may beless while the vehicle is running. As a result, youmay need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it offthan you were to start it.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 118.

The following functionsmay be available ifyour vehicle hasthe remote keylessentry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehiclehas this feature, it may be started from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter. See “RemoteVehicle Start” following for more detailedinformation.

With Remote Start(Without Remote Start

Similar)

119

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds of the previouspress of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295 foradditional information. Pressing the lock buttonmay arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Ifenabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) onpage 295. Pressing the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarmwill turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to preventanother transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter. Onceyour dealer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehiclecan have a maximum of eight transmitters matchedto it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DICOperation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) onpage 274 or DIC Operation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 281 for instructions on how tomatch RKE transmitters to your vehicle.

120

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 285 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery,use care not to touch any of the circuitry.Static from your body transferred to thesesurfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the

notch, located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottom halffrom the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

121

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normal operation of thesystem will return after the key is turned to theRUN position.

During a remote start, if your vehicle has anautomatic climate control system, the climatecontrol system will default to a heating modeduring colder outside temperatures and a coolingmode during warmer outside temperatures. Ifyour vehicle does not have an automatic climatecontrol system, during remote start, the climatecontrol system will turn on at the setting the vehiclewas set to when the vehicle was last turned off.

During a remote start, if your vehicle has anautomatic climate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats will turn on during colder

outside temperatures and will shut off when thekey is turned to RUN. If your vehicle doesnot have an automatic climate control system,during remote start, you will need to manually turnthe heated seats on and off. See Heated Seatson page 12 for additional information.

Laws in some communities may restrict the useof remote starters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using the remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation. However,the range may be less while the vehicle is running.As a result, you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 118 foradditional information.

122

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold the remotestart button to start the vehicle.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button untilthe turn signal lights flash. If you cannotsee the vehicle’s lights, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing theremote start button again after the vehiclehas started will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps, whilethe engine is still running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes. Remote startcan be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separatetimes between driving sequences. The engine willrun for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again afterthe vehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to runfor 15 minutes.

The additional ten minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

123

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension has been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the keyis in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if thereis an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle startfeature are shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be enabled or disabled through the DIC.See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295for additional information. If your vehicle does nothave DIC buttons, see your dealer to enable ordisable the remote vehicle start system.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your RKE transmitter will have extended rangethat will allow you to lock or unlock your vehiclefrom approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

124

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the key in thedriver’s door.

From the inside, use the power door locks ormanual door locks. To lock or unlock the door withthe manual locks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

125

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch withthe unlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switchand a door is open, the doors will lock five secondsafter the last door is closed. You will hear threechimes to signal that the delayed locking feature isin use.

Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature and immediatelylock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is in theignition.

You can program this feature using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DELAY DOORLOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 295.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksVehicles with an automatic lock/unlock featureenable you to program the vehicle’s powerdoor locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 295 for more information on DICprogramming.

126

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening therear doors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door.

The rear doors must be open to access them.The label showing lock and unlock positionsis located near the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear doormanual lock, using the power door lockswitch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, if the vehicle has one.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Security Lock Labelshown

127

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking the key inthe vehicle when the key is in the ignition anda front door is open.

If the driver’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the driver’s door is open and thekey is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver’s door will unlock.

If the passenger’s side power door lock switchis pressed when the front passenger’s door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors willlock and then the front passenger’s door willunlock.

Rear Doors

Extended CabYour vehicle may have a rear access door(s) thatallows easier access to the rear area of theextended cab.

To open a rear accessdoor from the outside,first open the front door.Then, use the handlelocated on the frontedge of the rear accessdoor to open it.

You must fully close a rear access door beforeyou can close the front door.

128

To open a rear accessdoor from the inside,the front door must beopened first. Then,use the handle locatedon the inside of therear access doorto open.

Crew CabsIf your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open yourdoors from the inside or outside. Your vehicle mayalso have a feature which prevents childrenfrom opening the rear doors. See Rear DoorSecurity Locks on page 127 for more information.

Tailgate

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride on thetailgate, even when the vehicle is operatedat low speeds. People riding on thetailgate can easily lose their balance andfall in response to vehicle maneuvers.Falling from a moving vehicle may resultin serious injuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

On vehicles with a lock on the tailgate, use thekey to lock or unlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle whilepulling the tailgate toward you.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until itlatches.

After you put the tailgate back up, pull it backtowards you to be sure it latches securely.

129

Tailgate RemovalThe tailgate can be removed to allow for differentloading situations. Although the tailgate can beremoved without assistance, you may wantsomeone to assist you with the removal toavoid possible damage to the vehicle.

To remove the tailgate, do the following:1. Raise the tailgate

slightly and releaseboth retaining cableclips. To release theretaining cable clips,lift the cable so itpoints straight out.Lift the clip over thebolt, and push thecable forward thenrotate down.

2. With the tailgate about halfway open, lift theright edge of the tailgate from the lower pivot.On vehicles with the tailgate assist feature,raise the tailgate nearly all the way to theclosed position prior to removing the left edge.

3. Move the tailgate to the right to release theleft edge.

Reverse this procedure to reinstall the tailgate.Make sure the tailgate is secure.

130

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsTurn the hand crank on each door to manuallyraise or lower the manual windows.

131

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured or



killed if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

If your vehicle has power windows, the controlsare located on each of the side doors in the frontand rear for crew cab and extended cab models.

The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’sand rear windows as well. Your power windowswill work when the ignition has been turnedto ACCESSORY or RUN or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 141.

K (Window Up/Down): Press the switch downto lower the window, and pull up the front ofthe switch to raise the window.

132

Express Down WindowsThe driver and front passenger windows also havean express down feature that allows the windowsto be lowered without holding the switch. Pressdown fully on the window switch, then release,to activate the express down mode. The expressdown mode can be canceled at any time bypulling up on the switch. To open the windowpartway, press the switch to the first depressionposition, until the window is at the desired position.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab orextended cab vehicle has power windows, thedriver’s door power window switch has a lockoutfeature. The lockout switch is located in front of thewindow switches. This feature prevents the rearwindows from operating, except from the driver’sposition. Press the switch to engage or disengagethe lockout feature. An indicator light on the switchwill come on when the lockout feature is engaged,and will go off when disengaged.

133

Power Sliding Rear Window

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured or



killed if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

On vehicles equippedwith a power sliding rearwindow, the switch islocated in the overheadconsole.

134

The power sliding rear window will work whenthe ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY,RUN, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 141 for more information.

The power sliding rear window cannot be operatedmanually.

Press the rear of the switch to open the window.Press the front of the switch to close the window.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing thesun visor to the side to cover the side window.

The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanitymirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate thetheft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The security lightshould come on and flash. The door doesnot need to be open.If the delayed locking feature is active, thealarm will not be activated until all doors areclosed and the security light goes off.

3. Close all doors. The security light will stopflashing and go off after approximately30 seconds. The content theft deterrent alarmis not armed until the security light goes off.

135

If a locked door is opened without using thekey in the driver’s door key cylinder or the RKEtransmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If thekey is not placed in the ignition and turned toSTART or the door is not unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter during theten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Yourvehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn willsound for about two minutes, then will turn off tosave the battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if thedoors are locked with the vehicle’s key or themanual door lock. It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch with the door open orthe RKE transmitter. You should also rememberthat you can start your vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has been set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you do not want to activate thetheft-deterrent system, the vehicle shouldbe locked with the door key after the doorsare closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set off thealarm if the system has been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off thealarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter orby placing the key in the ignition and turning itto START.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, butthe vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if thehorn works. The horn fuse may be blown. Toreplace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 618.

If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’sheadlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

136

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrentsystem. This means you do not have to do anythingspecial to arm or disarm the system. It works whenyou transition the key to RUN, ACCESSORY orSTART from the OFF position.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the securitylight on the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen trying to start the vehicle, the key may havea damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

137

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to checkthe fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 618. If the engine still does not start withthe other key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.See your dealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. Inan emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto learn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keysmay be programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost or donot operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank thatis cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turnit to the RUN position within five seconds ofremoving the original key.The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer/retailer.

138

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in thevehicle.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)

or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant

speed, fast or slow, for the first500 miles (805 km). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoid downshiftingto brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 449 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

139

Ignition PositionsUse the key to turnthe ignition switch tofour different positions.

A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. The keycan only be removed when the ignition is turnedto LOCK.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets things likethe radio and the windshield wipers operate whilethe engine is off.

Lengthy operation of features such as the radioin the ACCESSORY ignition position and the RUNposition may drain the battery and prevent yourvehicle from starting. Do not operate your vehiclein the ACCESSORY ignition position for a longperiod of time.

C (RUN): This is the position for driving. It is theposition the ignition switch returns to after theengine starts, and the key is released.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

140

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The vehicle accessories can be used for upto 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• OnStar® System (if equipped)

• Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when the key is in RUN orACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN toLOCK, the windows and sunroof continue to workuntil a door is opened. The radio continues to workfor up to 10 minutes or until the driver’s door isopened.

Starting the EngineIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

To place the transmission in the proper gear:

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not startin any other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

141

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do not racethe engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and the keyis held in START for many seconds, crankingwill be stopped after 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, let go of thekey and accelerator. If the vehicle starts brieflybut then stops again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from the engine. Donot race the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up and lubricates all movingparts.

142

Notice: Your engine is designed to workwith the electronics in your vehicle. If youadd electrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalOn vehicles with this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.

This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move toward the driverfor better pedal reach.

No adjustment to the pedals can be made whenthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while usingthe cruise control.

The switch used toadjust the pedalsis located on theinstrument panelbelow the climatecontrol system.

Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch tomove the pedals closer to your body. Pressthe arrow at the top of the switch to move thepedals away from your body.

Before you start driving, fully press the brakepedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you.While driving, make only small adjustments.

Your vehicle may have a memory functionwhich lets pedal settings be saved and recalled.See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13for more information.

143

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Dieselengine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual formore information.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), useof the coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, nearthe power steering fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

144

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer/retailer in the area where you will beparking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer cangive you the best advice for that particular area.

Active Fuel Management™Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active FuelManagement™. This system allows the engineto operate on either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, such as cruising at aconstant vehicle speed, the system will operatein the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicleto achieve better fuel economy. When greaterpower demands are required, such as acceleratingfrom a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.

Your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™indicator. For more information on using thisdisplay see DIC Operation and Displays (With DICButtons) on page 274 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281.

145

Automatic Transmission OperationIf your vehicle is has an automatic transmission,it has an electronic shift position indicatorwithin the instrument panel cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition key is turned tothe RUN position.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever. See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you startthe engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill, especially whenthe vehicle has a heavy load, you might noticean increase in the effort to shift out of Park.See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)under Shifting Into Park (P) on page 170 formore information.Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed

Automatic Transmission

Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-SpeedAutomatic Transmission

146

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 170.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 449.

{CAUTION:

If you have Four-Wheel Drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll — even if your shift leveris in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel DriveLow — not in NEUTRAL. See Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 170.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426.

147

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running athigh speed may damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to thenext gear and has more power.

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills,or for off-road driving. You might want to shiftthe transmission to a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding. See Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 393

Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature thatadjusts the transmission shifting to the currentdriving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshiftsand downshifts. This shift stabilization feature isdesigned to determine, before making an upshift,if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speedby analyzing things such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.

148

If the shift stabilization feature determines that acurrent vehicle speed cannot be maintained,the transmission does not upshift and insteadholds the current gear. In some cases, this couldappear to be a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. Adaptive shift controls continuallycompares key shift parameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer.The transmission constantly makes adjustments toimprove vehicle performance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load orwhen temperature changes. During this adaptiveshift control process, shifting might feel different asthe transmission determines the best settings.

When temperatures are very cold, the AllisonTransmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speedtransmission’s gear shifting could be delayedproviding more stable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference in shifting is normal.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position, is availableon vehicles with the Allison Transmission® orHydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission. It lets drivers

select the range of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If your vehicle has this feature,see Range Select Mode (Allison Transmission® orHydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission) later in thissection.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using the brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also wantto use the brakes off and on.

If you manually select SECOND (2) in anautomatic transmission, the transmission willstart in second gear. You can use this featurefor reducing the speed of the rear wheels whenyou are trying to start your vehicle from a stop onslippery road surfaces.

149

FIRST (1): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speedtransmission this position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingthe brakes. You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is putin FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward,the transmission does not shift into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.

For an Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic®

6-Speed transmission, this position reducesvehicle speed without using your brakes. You canuse it for major/severe downgrades and off-roaddriving where the vehicle would otherwiseaccelerate due to steepness of grade. When youshift to FIRST (1) it provides the lowest gearappropriate to your current road speed andcontinues to downshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to FIRST (1) gear.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be coveredby your warranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Range Selection Mode (Allison® orHydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)

Your vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode.The Range Selection Mode helps control thevehicle’s transmission and vehicle speed whiledriving down hill or towing a trailer by lettingyou select a desired range of gears.

150

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to the MANUALMODE (M).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located onthe steering column shift lever, to selectthe desired range of gears for your currentdriving conditions.

When MANUAL MODE (M) is selected a numberdisplays next to the M, indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear that can be used.However, your vehicle can automatically shift tolower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions.This means that all gears below that number areavailable. When FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1)through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically shiftedby the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used untilthe plus/minus button located on the steeringcolumn lever is used to change to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available when the RangeSelection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 152.

While using the Range Selection mode feature,cruise control and the Tow/Haul mode canbe used.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be coveredby your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction ModeIf your vehicle has the Allison Transmission®, orthe Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission,it has a Low Traction Mode that assist in vehicleacceleration when road conditions are slippery,such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select the second gear range using the RangeSelection system. This will limit torque to the wheelsafter it detects wheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.

151

Tow/Haul Mode

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, ithas a tow/haul mode. If your vehicle has an Allisonor Hydra-Matic® 6-speed automatic transmissionsee “Tow/Haul Mode (Allison or Hydra-Matic®

6-Speed Automatic Transmission®) following.

The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmissionshift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehicle control, andtransmission cooling when towing or haulingheavy loads.

The selector button is located on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the tow/haul on and off bypressing the button. When the tow/haul ison, a light on the instrument panel cluster willcome on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 272 for moreinformation.

Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Traileron page 449 for more information.

152

Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission®

or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

If your vehicle has an Allison or Hydra-Matic®

6-speed automatic transmission®, it has a tow/haulmode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmissionshift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehicle control, andtransmission cooling when towing or haulingheavy loads.

Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressingthe button, located on the end of the shiftlever. When the tow/haul is on, a light on theinstrument panel cluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 272 for moreinformation.

Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Traileron page 449 for more information.

Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®

or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)The Grade Braking shift modes can be activatedby pressing the button on the end of the shiftcontrol lever. While in Range Selection Mode,Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driverto select a desired range of gears.

153

Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and you are not in the RangeSelection Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listedpreviously and Automatic Transmission Operationon page 146 for more information on the RangeSelection Mode. Grade Braking assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by automatically implementinga shift schedule that utilizes the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wearon the braking system and increases control of thevehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed,acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal usage.Using this information, it detects when the truck ison a downhill grade and the driver desires to slowthe vehicle by pressing the brake. See the dieselsupplement for information on Cruise GradeBraking.

Also see Towing a Trailer on page 449 for moreinformation.

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you cansend the engine’s driving power to all four wheelsfor extra traction. To get the most satisfactionout of Four-Wheel Drive, you must be familiar withits operation. Read the part that follows beforeusing Four-Wheel Drive. See the appropriatetext for the transfer case in your vehicle.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-DriveLow for an extended period of time may causepremature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.Do not drive on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-DriveLow for extended periods of time.

While driving on clean dry pavement and duringtight turns, you may experience vibration inthe steering system.

Front Axle Locking FeatureThe front axle locks and unlocks automaticallywhen you shift the transfer case. Some delay forthe axle to lock or unlock is normal.

154

Manual Transfer Case

The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to theright of the driver. Use this lever to shift intoand out of Four-Wheel Drive.

A Four-Wheel Driveindicator light comeson when you shift intofour-wheel drive and thefront axle engages. SeeFour-Wheel-Drive Lighton page 271

Some delay between shifting and when theindicator light comes on is normal.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443Towing Your Vehicle on page 443

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extended period of timecan cause premature wear on your vehicle’spowertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavementin Four-Wheel Drive for extended periodsof time.

4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting alsoengages the front axle and delivers extra torque.You may never need Four-Wheel-Drive Low.It sends maximum power to all four wheels.

155

You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if youare driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deepsnow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.When operating in Four-Wheel Low, the gear ratioprovides additional torque when compared toFour-Wheel-Drive High. The transmission gearshift feel is exaggerated.

A parking brake symbolis located next to theN (NEUTRAL) symbolas a reminder to set theparking brake beforeshifting the transfercase in Neutral.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You orsomeone else could be seriously injured.Be sure to set the parking brake beforeplacing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.See Parking Brake on page 169.

N (NEUTRAL): Shift to this setting only whenyour vehicle needs to be towed. See RecreationalVehicle Towing on page 443 or Towing YourVehicle on page 443

2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting isused for driving in most street and highwaysituations. The front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting also providesthe best fuel economy.

156

4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use this settingwhen you need extra traction, such as on snowy oricy roads or in most off-road situations. This settingalso engages the front axle to help drive yourvehicle. This is the best setting to use whenplowing snow.

You can shift from Two-Wheel-Drive High toFour-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Highto Two-Wheel-Drive High while the vehicle ismoving. In extremely cold weather, it may benecessary to stop or slow the vehicle toshift into Four-Wheel-Drive High.

When Using the Manual Transfer Case• Shifting should be made using quick motions.

Shifting slowly may make it more difficultto shift.

• You may notice that it is harder to shift whenthe vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms upthe shifting will return to normal.

• While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-DriveLow you may experience reduced fueleconomy.

• Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean,dry pavement. It may cause your tires to wearfaster, and make the transfer case harder toshift and run noisier.

• If the transfer case shifter is in the NEUTRALposition and you have difficulty reaching theselected transfer case mode, with the enginerunning, shift the transmission momentarily todrive and then back to NEUTRAL. This willrealign the gear teeth in the transfer caseand allow you to complete the shift.

Shifting from Two-Wheel-Drive High toFour-Wheel-Drive High• Shifts between Two-Wheel-Drive High and

Four-Wheel-Drive High can be made atany vehicle speed.

• Shift the transfer case lever in one continuousmotion into either the Four-Wheel-Drive Highor Two-Wheel-Drive High position.

• In extremely cold weather, it may benecessary to slow or stop the vehicle toshift into Four-wheel-Drive High until yourvehicle has warmed up.

• While in Four-Wheel-Drive High, your vehiclecan be driven at any posted legal speed limit.

157

Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low

Notice: Shifting the transfer case intoFour-Wheel-Drive Low while moving atspeeds faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) maycause premature wear to the transfer case,and may cause the gears to grind. To avoidcausing premature wear, and grinding thegears, do not shift the transfer case intoFour-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle ismoving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should bedone, if possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll,3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

• Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even ifthe transmission is in PARK (P). You orsomeone else could be seriously injured.



Be sure to set the parking brake beforeplacing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.See Parking Brake on page 169.

• Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low withthe vehicle at a stop may be more difficult.You may be unable to complete the shift toFour-Wheel-Drive Low, and will end up inNEUTRAL. This is normal, and is a function ofthe gear teeth aligning in your transfer case.When this happens, make sure the engine ison, shift your transmission momentarily to driveand back to NEUTRAL, and then completethe shift.

• Shift the transfer case shift lever in onecontinuous motion into the Four-Wheel-DriveLow position.

• When Four-Wheel-Drive Low do not drivefaster than 45 mph. This will reduce wear andextend the life of your transfer case.

158

Shifting In or Out of NEUTRAL

1. With the vehicle running and the engine at anidle set the parking brake.

2. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).

Shift the transfer case in one continuous motioninto or out of the NEUTRAL position.

Electronic Transfer Case

The transfer case knobis located next to thesteering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheeldrive.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YESSevere YESExtreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443Towing Your Vehicle on page 443

You can choose among four driving settings:

Indicator lights in the dial show which setting youare in. The indicator lights will come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If thelights do not come on, you should take your vehicleto your dealer for service. An indicator light flasheswhile shifting the transfer case and remainsilluminated when the shift is complete. If for somereason the transfer case cannot make a requestedshift, it will return to the last chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This settingis used for driving in most street and highwaysituations. The front axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting also provides thebest fuel economy.

159

4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use theFour-Wheel-Drive High position when extra tractionis needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or inmost off-road situations. This setting also engagesthe front axle to help drive your vehicle. This isthe best setting to use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This settingalso engages the front axle and delivers extratorque. You may never need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels. You mightchoose Four-Wheel-Drive Low while drivingoff-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,and while climbing or descending steep hills.StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.

{CAUTION:


N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing on page 443 orTowing Your Vehicle on page 443 for moreinformation.

If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on,you should take your vehicle to your dealer forservice. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.

160

Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive HighTurn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive Highposition. This can be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low.See Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Lowfor more information.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive LowWhen Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehiclespeed should be kept below 45 mph. Extendedhigh-speed operation in Four-Wheel-DriveLow may damage or shorten the life of thedrivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, theignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) withthe transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferredmethod for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Lowis to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to theFour-Wheel-Drive Low position. You mustwait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicatorlight to stop flashing and remain on beforeshifting your transmission in gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicator light hasstopped flashing could damage the transfercase. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,always wait for the mode indicator lightsto stop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significantengagement noise and bump when shiftingbetween Four-Wheel-Drive Low andFour-Wheel-Drive High ranges or fromNEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-DriveLow position when your vehicle is in gear and/ormoving, the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds and not completethe shift unless your vehicle is moving lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission isin NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.

161

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive LowTo shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low toFour-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-DriveHigh, your vehicle must be stopped or movingless than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmissionin NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.The preferred method for shifting out ofFour-Wheel-Drive Low is to have your vehiclemoving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, orTwo-Wheel-Drive High position. You must wait forthe Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-DriveHigh indicator light to stop flashing and remainon before shifting the transmission into gear.


It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significantengagement noise and bump when shiftingbetween Four-Wheel-Drive Low andFour-Wheel-Drive High ranges or fromNEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position whenyour vehicle is in gear and/or moving, theFour-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive Highindicator light will flash for 30 seconds but willnot complete the shift unless your vehicle ismoving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N).

Shifting into NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

2. Set the parking brake and press and hold theregular brake pedal. See Parking Brake onpage 169 for more information.

3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.

4. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel-Drive High.

162

6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwiseto NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for10 seconds. Then slowly release the dialto the four low position. The NEUTRAL lightwill come on when the transfer case shiftto NEUTRAL is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verify that thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shiftingthe transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmissionto DRIVE (D) for one second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which willturn the engine off.

9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

10. Release the parking brake prior to movingthe vehicle.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) andturn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-DriveHigh.After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.

4. Release the parking brake prior to moving thevehicle.


5. Start the engine and shift the transmission tothe desired position.

163

Excessively shifting the transfer case into or outof the different modes may cause the transfercase to enter the shift protection mode. This willprotect the transfer case from possible damage andwill only allow the transfer case to respond to oneshift per 10 seconds. The transfer case may stay inthis mode for up to three minutes.

Automatic Transfer Case

The transfer case knobis located next to thesteering column.

For information on StabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 385.

Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-WheelDrive.

You can choose among five driving settings:

Indicator lights in the dial show which setting youare in. The indicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition and one will stayon. If the lights do not come on, you shouldtake your vehicle to your dealer for service.An indicator light will flash while shifting thetransfer case. It will remain illuminated when theshift is complete. If for some reason the transfercase cannot make a requested shift, it will returnto the last chosen setting.

2 m(Two-Wheel-Drive High): This settingis used for driving in most street and highwaysituations. The front axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting also providesthe best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): Thissetting is ideal for use when road surface tractionconditions are variable. When driving your vehiclein AUTO, the front axle is engaged, but thevehicle’s power is sent only to the front and rearwheels automatically based on driving conditions.Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fueleconomy than Two-Wheel-Drive High.

164

4 m(Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use theFour-Wheel-Drive High position when extratraction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roadsor in most off-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drive your vehicle.This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.

4 n(Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This settingalso engages the front axle and delivers extratorque. You may never need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels. You mightchoose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are drivingoff-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,and while climbing or descending steep hills.StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.See StabiliTrak® System on page 385 formore information.

{CAUTION:


N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing on page 443 orTowing Your Vehicle on page 443 for moreinformation.

If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on,you should take your vehicle to your dealer forservice. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.

165

Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive High orAUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High orAUTO position. This can be done at any speed,except when shifting from Four-Wheel-DriveLow, and the indicator light will flash while shifting.It will remain on when the shift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive HighTurn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive Highposition. This can be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive LowWhen Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehiclespeed should be kept below 45 mph. Extendedhigh-speed operation in Four-Wheel-DriveLow may damage or shorten the life of thedrivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, theignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) withthe transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferredmethod for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Lowis to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the

Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. You must wait forthe Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stopflashing and remain on before shifting yourtransmission in gear.


It is typical for your vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise and bumpwhen shifting between Four-Wheel-DriveLow and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges orfrom NEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-DriveLow position when your vehicle is in gear and/ormoving, the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds and not completethe shift unless your vehicle is moving lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission isin NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.

166

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive LowTo shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Lowto Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO orTwo-Wheel-Drive High, your vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) andthe ignition in RUN. The preferred method forshifting out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to haveyour vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High position.You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High,AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator lightto stop flashing and remain on before shifting yourtransmission into gear.


It is typical for your vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise and bumpwhen shifting between Four-Wheel-DriveLow and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges orfrom NEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,AUTO, or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch positionwhen your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, theFour-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-DriveHigh indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but willnot complete the shift unless your vehicle is movingless than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is inNEUTRAL (N).

Shifting into NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

2. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal. See Parking Brake on page 169for more information.

167

3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

5. Shift the transfer case to Two-WheelDrive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwiseto NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for10 seconds. Then slowly release the dialto the four low position. The NEUTRAL lightwill come on when the transfer case shiftto NEUTRAL is complete.

7. If the engine is running, make sure that thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shiftingthe transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmissionto DRIVE (D) for one second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which willturn the engine off.

9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

10. Release the parking brake prior to movingthe vehicle.


Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) andturn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-DriveHigh, Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO.After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.

4. Release the parking brake prior to moving thevehicle.


5. Start the engine and shift the transmission tothe desired position.

168

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push downthe parking brake pedal with your left foot.

A chime sounds and the warning light flasheswhen the parking brake is applied and the vehicleis moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h).

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge ofthe lever, with the parking brake symbol andlocated above the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light goes off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 449.

169

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. With four-wheeldrive, if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL,your vehicle will be free to roll, even ifyour shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be



sure the transfer case is in a drivegear — not in NEUTRAL. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 449.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 169 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear — not in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

170

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive and yourtransfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehiclewill be free to roll, even if your shift leveris in PARK (P). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.

And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat andeven catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave your vehicle withthe engine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is calledtorque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into PARK (P) properly beforeyou leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park (P) on page 170.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

171

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will be able topull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK.Apply your regular brakes before shiftingfrom PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 146.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all the wayup into PARK (P) as the brake application ismaintained. Move the shift lever into another gear.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

172

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

173

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, here are some thingsto know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 173.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 422.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

174

{CAUTION:

Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfercase in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle toroll, even if the shift lever is in PARK (P).So, be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear — not in NEUTRAL. Always set theparking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 170.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 449.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorPull or push the tab under the inside rearviewmirror to adjust it to the night or daytime setting.In the nighttime setting, the glare from headlampsbehind the vehicle will be less intense.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this feature. When on,the automatic dimming mirror dims to the properlevel to minimize glare from lights behind youafter dark.

The mirror has a dual display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror face that shows the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System onpage 185 for more information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

175

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needs tobe calibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” following.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until eithera flashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity,the new unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, see yourdealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, adelay in updating the temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror comes on eachtime the ignition is turned to start. To turn theautomatic dimming feature off or back on, press theon/off button. The indicator light on the mirror is litwhen the automatic dimming feature is on.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic notepad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.

176

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass varianceif the vehicle is outside of zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance isthe difference between earth’s magnetic northand true geographic north. If not adjusted toaccount for compass variance, the compasscould give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appears in the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.Release the button. After approximatelyfour seconds of inactivity, the new zonenumber will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return.

177

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplayYour vehicle may have this mirror. When on, anautomatic dimming mirror will dim to the properlevel to minimize glare from lights behind you afterdark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror with the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the displayon or off.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressingthe compass/temperature button. Pressing thecompass/temperature button once briefly, willtoggle the display reading on and off. To alternatethe temperature reading between Fahrenheit andCelsius, press and hold the compass/temperaturebutton for approximately three seconds untilthe display blinks F and C. After approximatelyfive seconds of inactivity, the display will stopblinking and display the last selection made.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, see your dealer.Under certain circumstances, a delay in updatingthe temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation

O On/Off: Press this button to turn the automaticdimming feature on or off. The indicator light tothe left of the button will turn on to indicate whenthe feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,it will remain off until it is turned back on, or untilthe vehicle is restarted.

178

Compass OperationPress the compass/temperature button oncebriefly to turn the display on or off.

Compass CalibrationSee “Compass Calibration” under AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display on page 175 for moreinformation.

Compass VarianceSee “Compass Variance” under AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display on page 175 for moreinformation.

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as that may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust your outside mirrors so you can just seethe side of your vehicle and have a clear view ofobjects behind you. The mirrors can be foldedin to enter narrow areas.

The use of hood-mounted air deflectors andadd-on convex mirror attachments may adverselyaffect mirror performance.

179

Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors, theycan be adjusted so you can have a clear viewof the objects behind you. Manually pull outthe mirror head to extend it for better visibilitywhen towing a trailer.

These mirrors can be manually folded forwardor rearward. The lower portion of the mirroris convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from the driver’s seat.The convex mirror can be adjusted manually tothe driver’s preferred position for better vision.

Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrorswhich help clear them of condensation, snow,and ice. When the rear window defogger buttonis pressed, the heated mirrors are also turned on.Only the upper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated.

Your mirror may also have a turn signal arrowthat will flash in the direction of the turn orlane change.

180

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower mirrors, thecontrols are locatedon the driver’sdoor armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (A) again to deselect the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s sidemirror. Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (B) again to deselect the mirror.

This mirror has the following features.

Manual FoldingThe mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.

Heated MirrorsThe button to turn the heated mirrors on or offis located on the climate control panel. Pressthis button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them ofice, snow, and condensation.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 244for more information.

181

Convex MirrorThe passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so morecan be seen from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

Outside Power Foldaway MirrorsIf your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower foldaway mirrors,the controls are locatedon the driver’s doorarmrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the drivingposition.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

182

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

Automatic DimmingThe driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glareof the headlamps behind you. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display on page 175.

Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has the memory package, theoutside mirrors are able to perform the curbview assist mirror function. This feature maybe useful in allowing the driver to view the curbwhen parallel parking. This feature will causethe passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt toa preselected position when the vehicle isin REVERSE (R).

The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror willreturn to its original position when the vehicleis shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition isturned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 273.

183

Heated MirrorsThe button to turn the heated mirrors on or off islocated on the climate control panel. Pressthis button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them ofice, snow, and condensation.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 244for more information.

Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so morecan be seen from the driver’s seat.

Your vehicle may also have a turn signal indicatoron the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flashin the direction of the turn or lane change.

184

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button andthey can contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and

the OnStar® Terms and Conditions are included inthe vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber glove boxliterature. For more information, visit onstar.com oronstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an OnStar®

advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide inyour glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

185

Available Services withSafe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification

(AACN) (If equipped)• Link to Emergency Services• Roadside Assistance• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance• AccidentAssist• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with

30 complimentary minutes• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or

OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)• RideAssist• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, and can beused with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

186

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 372 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be usedto dial numbers into voicemail systems, or todial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or if

your airbags or AACN system deploys. Thevehicle information usually includes your GPSlocation and, in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the accident that your vehiclehas been involved in (e.g. the direction fromwhich your vehicle was hit). When you use theVirtual Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

187

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and availablein that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

System IdentificationYour vehicle may have a Universal Home RemoteSystem.

Determine which Universal Home Remote yourvehicle has and then read the pages followingfor instructions on programming your specificsystem.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED).

188

If there are three round LED indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal HomeRemote System, call the customer assistancephone number under Customer Assistance Officeson page 656.

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.








189

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in theprogramming steps

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orgate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

190

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemTo program up to three devices:

1. Press and hold down the two outside UniversalHome Remote buttons, releasing only whenthe Universal Home Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not holddown the buttons for longer than 30 secondsand do not repeat this step to program asecond and/or third hand-held transmitter tothe remaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. At the same time, press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase allof the programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

191

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed Universal Home Remote buttonfor two seconds, then release it. Immediatelypress and hold the same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it. Immediately,press and hold the same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

192

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed withStep 2 under “Programming UniversalHome Remote” shown earlier in this section.


193

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, followthe instructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for FixedCode programming. It is also recommendedthat upon the sale or lease termination of thevehicle, the programmed buttons should beerased for security purposes. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orsecurity device you are programming.

194

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeMost garage door openers sold after 1996 areRolling Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow these actions,the device will time out and you will have to repeatthe procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the twooutside buttons at the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediately release them.

195

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attached tothe motor-head unit and may be a coloredbutton. Press this button. After you press thisbutton, you will have 30 seconds to completethe following steps.

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press andhold the universal home remote button thatyou would like to use to control the garagedoor until the garage door moves. Theindicator light, above the selected button,should slowly blink. You may need to holdthe button from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, releasethe button when the garage door moves.The indicator light will blink rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device suchas an additional garage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1through 5, choosing a different function buttonin Step 3 than what you used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probablyhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow theProgramming instructions that follow for a FixedCode garage door opener.

196

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeMost garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you willhave to repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage dooropener, remove the battery cover on your handheld transmitter supplied by the manufacturerof your garage door opener motor. If you seea row of dip switches similar to the graphicabove, you have a Fixed Code garage dooropener. If you do not see a row of dip switches,return to the previous section for ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote – Rolling Code.

197

Your panel of switches may not appearexactly as they do in the examples above,but they should be similar.The switch positions on your hand-heldtransmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeledas “Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may belabeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may belabeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

198

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settingsfrom left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote down inStep 2 will now become the button strokesyou enter into the Universal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter the switch settingsthat you wrote down in Step 2, in order fromleft to right, into the Universal Home Remote,when completing Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly pressall three buttons at the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release the buttons to putthe Universal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will have twoand one-half minutes to complete Step 4.Now press one button on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch setting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in thevehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button inthe vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middlebutton in the vehicle.

199

5. After entering all of the switch positions,again, firmly press and release all threebuttons at the same time. The indicator lightswill turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would liketo use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,choosing a different button in Step 6 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at thesame time for approximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly abovethe buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.

200


Storage AreasYour vehicle may have a cover on the top of eachbed side. To access the stake pockets below,you must cut out the square and remove it.

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have cupholders located on andbehind the center console and in the rear seatarmrest. Pull the loop down on the rear seatarmrest to access the cupholders.

Pull downward on the lid to use the cupholdersbehind the center console.

201

Instrument Panel Storage AreaYour vehicle may have an instrument panelstorage area. It is located above the glove box.

To open, press and hold the driver’s side of thehandle in and pull out on the exposed portionof the handle.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have an upper and lower centerconsole storage area with cupholders.

To access the upper storage area, pull lever (A) up.To access the lower storage area, raise the upperstorage bin, then pull lever (B) up. Use the key tolock and unlock the lower storage area.

202

Luggage CarrierThe vehicle may have a luggage carrier that canbe used to load things on top of the vehicle.

The luggage carrier has siderails attached to theroof. It may also have crossrails which can bemoved back and forth to help secure cargo.Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggagecarrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg)or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo sothat it rests on the slats as far forwardas possible and against the side rails,making sure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 428.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you aredriving, check to make sure the luggage andcargo are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof,cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit insidethe crossrails and siderails to spread the load.Tie the plywood to the siderail supports.

• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderailsupports. Use the crossrails only to keep theload from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift therelease lever, on both sides of the rail, up toloosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desiredposition balancing the force side to side. Pressthe release lever on both sides of the rail, downto tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back andforth slightly to be sure it is tight.

• If you need to carry long items, movethe crossrails as far apart as they will go.Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderailsor siderail supports. Also tie the load to thebumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly thatthe crossrails or siderails are damaged.

• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securelylocked into the siderail.

Your vehicle has a Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) located above the rear glass.

203

If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle,care should be taken not to block or damage theCHMSL unit.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrestthat contains two cupholders. To access thecupholders, pull the armrest down from the rearseatback.

Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle may have a cargo managementsystem. It is located in the bed of the truck. Thesystem contains three rails located on the front andsides of the bed.

The system will include four adjustable cargotie-downs. The tie-downs can be placed on theupper and lower slides of the rail.

To adjust a tie-down, pull the locator pin out andmove the tie-down to another location makingsure the locator pin lines up with a locator holeon the rail. If the locator pin does not line up withthe locator hole, the tie-down may be installedincorrectly. Turn it over and reinstall. Once thepin is inside the hole, the tie-down will not moveside to side. The maximum load for each railis 500 lbs (227 kg).

204

The rails are notched at each end which allowsthe tie-downs to be removed and placed onanother rail. To remove, pull the locator pin outand slide the tie-down to the end of the railand pull back.

To remove or install cargo tie-downs at the front ofthe bed, slide the corner cap towards the center ofthe bed to expose the rail notches. To remove thecorner cap, pull either edge away from the rail.

To remove the system, loosen the toggle boltson each rail until they can be removed fromthe bed of the truck. To replace the system,place the toggle bolts and rails into their originallocations and tighten them to a torque settingof 12.5 ft-lbs (17Y).

If the system is removed to install a bed liner,make sure there is no bed liner material inthe installation points.

Notice: If you tie down cargo using thehorizontal slots on the top of the pickup box,you may damage the box. Using the horizontalslots on the top of the pickup box for tie-downlocations may cause damage to the pickup boxand would not be covered by your warranty.Only use the tie-down loops if you do not havethe cargo management system.

SunroofIf your vehicle has a power sliding sunroof,the ignition needs to be turned to RUN, or theRetained Accessory Power (RAP) must beactivated to open or close the sunroof. When RAPis active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutes afterthe ignition is turned off, or until the driver’s door isopened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 141 for more information.

205

Extended Cab

If your vehicle is anextended-cab, thesunroof switch is locatedon the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position, press and hold therear of the switch to vent the sunroof. To close thesunroof, press and hold the front of the switch.

Open: From the vent position, the sunroof canbe fully opened either manually or by using theexpress-open feature. To open manually, press therear of the switch to the first depression and holduntil the sunroof has reached the desired position.To open using express-open, press the rear of theswitch fully and release. The sunroof will move tothe full open position. To stop the sunroof partway,press the switch a second time.

Close: From the vent, or open position, press andhold the front of the switch to close the sunroof.

The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that canbe used to block the rays of the sun. The rollersunshade can be manually operated with thesunroof in an open or closed position. To open thesunshade, press and unlatch it, and roll it back.To close, pull it forward and latch it into the closedposition.

When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

206

Crew Cab

If your vehicle is acrew cab, there aretwo sunroof switcheslocated in the overheadconsole above therearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position, press the rear ofthe passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.To close the sunroof, press and hold the frontof the passenger’s side switch.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open thesunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’sside switch until the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. To close the sunroof, press and hold thefront of the driver’s side switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position.

When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-openthe sunroof, fully press and release the rear ofthe driver’s side switch. The sunroof will openautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. To express-close thesunroof, fully press and release the front of thedriver’s side switch. The sunroof will closeautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway,press the switch a second time.

The sunroof also has a sunshade which you canpull forward to block sun rays. The sunshade mustbe opened and closed manually.

Anti-Pinch Feature (Crew Cab Only): If an objectis in the path of the sunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop thesunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction.The sunroof will then open halfway, and the airdeflector will raise. To close the sunroof once ithas re-opened, refer to the Express-Close orManual-Close functions described previously.If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there isan object in the path of the sunroof when it closing,the anti-pinch feature will detect the object andstop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once ithas re-opened, refer to the Manual-Close orExpress-Close functions described previously.

207

✍ NOTES

208

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 212Instrument Panel Overview

(Base/Uplevel version) ............................ 212Instrument Panel Overview

(Premium version) .................................. 215Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 217Other Warning Devices ............................. 217Horn .......................................................... 217Tilt Wheel .................................................. 218Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 218Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 219Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 220Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 220Windshield Wipers ..................................... 221Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 222Windshield Washer .................................... 223Cruise Control ........................................... 224Exterior Lamps .......................................... 227Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 228Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 228Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 229

Puddle Lamps ........................................... 230Fog Lamps ................................................ 230Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................... 231Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 231Dome Lamps ............................................. 232Dome Lamp Override ................................ 232Entry Lighting ............................................ 232Exit Lighting .............................................. 232Reading Lamps ......................................... 232Cargo Lamp .............................................. 233Electric Power Management ...................... 233Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 234Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 234Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 238Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 239

Climate Controls ......................................... 240Climate Control System

(With Air Conditioning) ........................... 240Climate Control System (Heater Only) ....... 243Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 244Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 251

Section 3 Instrument Panel

209

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 252Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 253Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 254Trip Odometer ........................................... 254Tachometer ............................................... 254Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 255Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

(1500 Series) ......................................... 255Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 256Airbag Off Light ......................................... 256Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 258Charging System Light .............................. 260Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 261Brake System Warning Light ..................... 262Antilock Brake System Warning Light ........ 263StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 264Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 264Tire Pressure Light .................................... 265Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 266

Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 269Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 270Security Light ............................................ 270Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 271Cruise Control Light .................................. 271Highbeam On Light ................................... 271Four-Wheel-Drive Light .............................. 271Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 272Fuel Gage ................................................. 272Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 273

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 273DIC Operation and Displays

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 274DIC Operation and Displays

(Without DIC Buttons) ............................ 281DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 285DIC Vehicle Customization

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 295


210

Audio System(s) ......................................... 306Setting the Time ........................................ 307AM-FM Radio ............................................ 310Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 312Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 318Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) ................. 328Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or

Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 345Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and

DVD Player) ........................................... 351XM Radio Messages ................................. 357

Navigation/Radio System ........................... 359Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 359Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 370Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 372Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 372Radio Reception ........................................ 373Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 374Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 375Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 375XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 375


211

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview (Base/Uplevel version)

212

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 251.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 218.

C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) on page 273.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 217.

E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 253.

F. Shift Lever. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 146. Tow/Haul SelectorButton (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 152. Range Selection Mode (AllisonTransmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-SpeedButton (If Equipped). See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 146.

G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 306.

H. Instrument Panel Storage Area. See InstrumentPanel Storage Area on page 202.

I. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (IfEquipped). See Towing a Trailer on page 449.

J. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lampson page 227.

K. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 504.

L. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 169.

M. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome LampOverride on page 232. Dome Lamp Knob.See Dome Lamps on page 232. Fog LampButton (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps onpage 230.

N. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control onpage 224.

O. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 218.P. Horn. See Horn on page 217.Q. Automatic Transfer Case Control (If Equipped).

See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154.

213

R. Ashtray (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 239.

S. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 385. UltrasonicRear Park Assist Disable Button (If Equipped).See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 234. Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped).See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 143. Heated Windshield WasherFluid Button (If Equipped). Windshield Washeron page 223.

T. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 238.

U. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem (With Air Conditioning ) on page 240 orClimate Control System (Heater Only) onpage 243 and Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 244.

V. Power Take Off (PTO) Control (If Equipped).See Power Take Off (PTO) in theDURAMAX® Diesel Supplement Index.

W. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.

X. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 201.

214

Instrument Panel Overview (Premium version)

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 251.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 218.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 253.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 217.

215

E. Shift Lever. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 146.

F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). SeeTow/Haul Mode on page 152.

G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) on page 273.

H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 306.

I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 227.

J. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (IfEquipped). See Towing a Trailer on page 449.

K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See DomeLamp Override on page 232. Dome LampKnob. See Dome Lamps on page 232.

L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154.

M. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 504.

N. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 169.

O. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control onpage 224.

P. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 218.

Q. Horn. See Horn on page 217.R. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 372.S. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System

(With Air Conditioning ) on page 240 orClimate Control System (Heater Only) onpage 243 or Dual Automatic Climate Controls(If Equipped). See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 244.

T. Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 238. Cigarette Lighter(If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and CigaretteLighter on page 239.

U. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 385. Pedal AdjustButton (If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttleand Brake Pedal on page 143. Rear Park AssistDisable Button (If Equipped). See UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 234.Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button(If Equipped). See Windshield Washer onpage 223.

V. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.

W. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 201.

216

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on top of thesteering column.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourvehicle’s turn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbolslocated on the steering wheel.

217

Tilt WheelThe tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. Raise it to the highest levelto give your legs more room when exitingor entering the vehicle.

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on thelower left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever. Then move the steering wheel to acomfortable position and release the lever to lockthe wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See

Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 219.• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 220.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 220.• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers

on page 221.• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield

Washer on page 223.

For information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 227.

218

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leverfor less than one second until the arrow startsto flash. This will cause the turn signals toautomatically flash three times. It will flashsix times if tow-haul mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more than one secondwill cause the turn signals to flash until yourelease the lever. The lever will return by itselfwhen it is released.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb may be burned out and other drivers will notsee your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and ablown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 618.

219

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of amile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flashof the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNALON will also appear in the Driver InformationControl (DIC). To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53 (Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger): To change the headlamps from low tohigh beam, push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beam headlamps, pullthe multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicator lighton the instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass. It works even if your headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position oron low beam, your high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as long as you hold thelever toward you. The high-beam indicator onthe instrument panel cluster will come on. Releasethe lever to return to normal operation.

220

Windshield WipersClear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If they are frozen to the windshield,gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiperblades may not clear the windshield well, makingit harder to see and drive safely. If the bladesdo become damaged, install new blades or bladeinserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 557.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a singlewiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start.Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Holdthe band on mist longer, for more wipe cycles.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.The delay between wiping cycles becomesshorter as the band is moved to the top of thelever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settings,for steady wiping at low speed.

? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to thesecond solid band past the delay settings, forhigh-speed wiping.

221

Rainsense™ II WipersIf your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshieldwipers, the moisture sensor is located next to theinside rearview mirror and is mounted on thewindshield. When active, these sensors are ableto detect moisture on the windshield andautomatically turn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipersmust be set to one of the five delay settings on themultifunction lever. Each of the five settingsadjusts the sensitivity of the rainsensor.

Since different drivers have different settingpreferences, it is recommended that the mid-rangesetting (position 3) be used initially. For morewipes, select the higher settings; for fewer wipes,select the lower settings located closer to theoff position on the multifunction lever.

The rainsensor will automatically control thefrequency of the wipes from the off setting to thehigh speed setting according to the weatherconditions. The wipers can be left in a rainsensemode even when it is not raining.

When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps willturn on automatically if the exterior lamp control isin the AUTO position.

Notice: Going through an automatic car washwith the wipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when going through anautomatic car wash.

222

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top of themultifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear the window and theneither stop or return to the preset speed.

Heated Windshield WasherIf your vehicle has the heated windshield washerfluid system it may be used to help clear ice,snow, tree sap, or bugs from your windshield.

The button is located inthe switchbank underthe climate controls.

Push the heated washer fluid button to activate theheated windshield washer fluid system. Theindicator light will flash. This activation initiatesfour heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heatedwash/wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds tooccur, depending on outside temperature. After thefirst wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to 20 secondsfor each of the remaining cycles to begin. Press thebutton again to turn off the heated windshieldwasher fluid system or it will automatically turn offafter four wipe cycles have been completed.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam may flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

223

Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise controlis turned off.

If your vehicle has an Allison® automatictransmission, see “Grade Braking and CruiseGrade Braking (Allison Transmission®) underTow/Haul Mode on page 152 for an explanation ofhow cruise control interacts with the RangeSelection Mode, tow/haul and grade brakingsystems.

If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak®™ system andbegins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruisecontrol, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385.When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may turn the cruise control back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

224

T (On/Off): This button can both activate andturn off the system. The indicator light is onwhen cruise control is on and turns off when cruisecontrol is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set thespeed or make the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol without erasing the set speed from memory.

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.2. Get up to the desired speed.3. Press the SET− button located on the steering

wheel and release it.4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf you apply the brakes while the cruise control isset, the cruise control is disengaged. But itdoes not need to be reset.Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle will go back to theprevious set speed and stay there.

225

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo increase the cruise speed while usingcruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button. Each time this isdone, the vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo reduce the vehicle speed while usingcruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the previousset cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. While going up steep hills,you might have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. While goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Ofcourse, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

• Press the On/Off button on thesteering wheel.

226

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turnedoff, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior LampsThe exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:• Headlamps• Taillamps• Parking Lamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Turn the control to this position to turnoff the automatic headlamps and daytimerunning lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp controlto the off position again to turn the automaticheadlamps or DRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off positionwill only work when the vehicle is shifted intoPARK (P).

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

When the vehicle is turned off and the headlampsare in AUTO, the headlamps may automaticallyremain on for a set time. The time of the delay canbe changed using the DIC. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 273.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:


• Taillamps


227

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing:

• Parking Lamps


• Taillamps


When the headlamps are turned on while thevehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. Whenthe headlamps are turned on while the vehicleis off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutesbefore automatically turning off to prevent thebattery from being drained. Turn the headlampcontrol to off and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward theinstrument panel to change the headlampsfrom low beam to high beam.

Headlamps on ReminderA reminder chime will sound when the headlampsor parking lamps are manually turned on andyour ignition is off and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the light off.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional DRL are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The engine is running.

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The light sensor determines it is daytime.

228

When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps areon. The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps arenot on. The instrument panel is not lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlampsystem switches from DRL to the headlamps.

When the headlamp switch is turned off, theheadlamps go off.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system turns on the headlamps at thenormal brightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio back lighting is also dimly lit.

To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turnthe exterior lamps switch to the off position.Turning off the automatic headlamp system withthe headlamp switch is not available for vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the topof the instrument panel in the defroster grillethat regulates when the automatic headlamps turnon. Be sure it is not covered, or the headlampswill come on whenever the ignition is on.

The automatic system could also come on whiledriving through a parking garage, tunnel, or inheavy overcast weather. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that driving under bridges orbright overhead street lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automatic headlamp systemare only affected when the light sensor detectsa change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comes onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it takesapproximately one minute for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it is brightenough outside. During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster might not be as bright as usual.Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 231.

229

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the control to the off position.

You might be able to turn off your AutomaticHeadlamp System. See Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on page 228 for more information.

The headlamps can also stay on after you exit thevehicle. This feature can be programmed usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 295.

The regular headlamp system can be turned onwhen needed.

Puddle LampsYour vehicle has puddle lamps, located at thebottom of the front doors. The puddle lamps comeon when a door is opened, or when the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)Transmitter is pressed. The lamps time out or turnoff once the engine is started.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the button is located on the instrument panelto the left of the steering column and below thedome lamp override button.

The ignition must be in RUN and the parkinglamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the fog lampsbutton. A light comes on in the instrumentpanel cluster to let you know that the fog lampsare on. Press the button again to turn the foglamps off.

When the fog lamps are turned on, the low-beamheadlamps automatically turn on.

The fog lamps turn off while you change tohigh-beam headlamps. When the high-beamheadlamps go off, the fog lamps will comeon again.

Fog lamps should only be used in foggy conditionssince they could be distracting to oncomingdrivers in clear weather conditions.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

230

Auxiliary Roof Mounted LampIf your vehicle has this feature, this button includeswiring provisions for a dealer or a qualifiedservice center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.

This button is locatedon the overheadconsole.

When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roofmounted lamp, pressing the bottom of thebutton will activate the lamp and illuminate anindicator light at the bottom of this button. Pressingthe top of the button will turn off the roof mountedlamp and indicator.

The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at30 amps, so the total current draw of theattached lamps should be less than this value.The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits aretwo blunt cut wires located above the overheadconsole, a dark green switched power wire and ablack ground wire.

For further information on roof mount emergencylamp installation, please visit the GM Upfitterwebsite at www.gmupfitters.com or contactyour dealer.

If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle mayhave the snow plow prep package. For furtherinformation see Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment on page 435.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): Thisfeature controls the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights.

The knob for this feature is located next to theheadlamp control.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights.Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrumentpanel cluster or radio display to full brightnesswhen the headlamps or parking lamps are on. Toturn on the dome lamps, turn the knob to thefarthest clockwise position.

231

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when any door isopened. They turn off after all the doors are closed.

The dome lamps can also be turned on by turningthe knob, located next to the exterior lampscontrol, clockwise to the farthest position. In thisposition, the dome lamps will remain on whether adoor is opened or closed.

Dome Lamp OverrideThe dome lamp override button is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

The dome lamp override is used to set the domelamps to remain off or come on automaticallywhen a door is opened.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button inand the dome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again to return it tothe extended position so that the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.

Entry LightingYour vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.

When the doors are opened, the dome lamps willcome on if the dome override button is in theextended position. If the dome override button ispressed in, the lamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on when the key isremoved from the ignition. They turn offautomatically in 20 seconds. The lights do notcome on if the dome override button is pressed in.

Reading LampsIf your vehicle has reading lamps they are locatedon the overhead console.

To turn on the reading lamps, press the buttonlocated next to each lamp. To turn them off, pressthe button again.

232

Your vehicle may also have reading lamps inother locations. To turn the lamps on or off, pressthe button located next to the lamp.

If your vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, press the lamp lenses to turn thelamps on or off.

The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamps come on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control knob to thefarthest clockwise position. This knob is located onthe instrument panel and also turns on thedome lamps.

The cargo lamp can be used if more light isneeded in the cargo area of the vehicle or in thetop-box storage units.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

233

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome and readinglamps, if they are left on for more than 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. The cargo lampshuts off after 20 minutes. This prevents thebattery from running down.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system it is designed to helpyou park while in REVERSE (R). It operates onlyat speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPAhelps make parking easier and helps you avoidcolliding with objects such as parked vehicles. TheURPA system detects objects that are close tothe rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood ortrunk level. The system detects objects up to8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPAsensors determine how close these objectsare from your bumper within this area.

234

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of5 mph (8 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 8 feet(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

The URPA display islocated near thepassenger side rearwindow and canbe seen by looking overyour right shoulder.

The URPA display has three color-coded lights.The lights are used to provide distance and systeminformation, along with beeps that will be heardthrough the speakers.

URPA can be turned offby pressing the rearpark aid disable buttonlocated below theclimate control system.

The indicator light will come on to indicate thatURPA is off.

235

The red light in the URPA display will also be lit ifthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehicle has aDriver Information Center (DIC), PARK ASSISTOFF will display on the screen. URPA automaticallyturns back on each time the vehicle is started.

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly come on to let youknow the display is operating correctly. URPAcomes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R).

The system does not work at a reverse speedgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,the red light on the rear display will flash.

How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detectsobjects close to the rear bumper. The first time anobject is detected a single beep will sound.

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedbetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), thefollowing describes what will occur based on yourdistance to a detected object located behind thevehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), abeeping sound will repeat for a short time andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.

Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate islowered, it may not detect an object behind yourvehicle, and you might back into the object anddamage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgateis closed when using URPA or turn off URPAwhen driving with the tailgate lowered.

URPA cannot detect objects that are abovetailgate level. In order for the rear sensors torecognize an object, it must be within detectionrange behind the vehicle.

236

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARK ASSISTOFF will be displayed on the DIC screen and ared light will come on the URPA display when theshift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). Thisoccurs under the following conditions:

• The driver disables the system.

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPAassumes the object is still attached, so you willhave to wait until the vehicle is driven forwardabove 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA willreturn to normal operation.

• A trailer ball hitch is attached to your vehicle.

• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So,be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper freeof mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing Your Vehicle onpage 611. If the DIC still displays the PARKASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

• When URPA is disabled without driver actionand the driver attempts to turn URPA back onby pressing the rear park aid button, theindicator light will flash for 3 seconds and thenstay lit to indicate that URPA is off.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

237

For Driver Information Center messages related toURPA, see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 285.

If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPAsystem may not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

The vehicle may have two accessory power outletslocated below the climate control system, or mayhave one accessory power outlet and one cigarettelighter. The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only inthe receptacle closest to the driver. There may beanother accessory power outlet in the rear cargoarea. If the vehicle has a floor console, there is anoutlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear ofthe floor console.

To use an outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational at all times.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain power accessory plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessorypower plugs.

238

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a front ashtray located nearthe center of the instrument panel. Pull on the doorto open it. The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, open the door and pull theashtray bin toward you. To replace the ashtray,insert the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door andpress down until it engages. To use the cigarettelighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it isready for use, the lighter pops back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while itis heating.

239

Climate Controls

Climate Control System (With AirConditioning)With this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

Use the right knob to select from thefollowing modes:

The right knob can be positioned betweentwo modes to select a combination of thosetwo modes.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets and half to thefloor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side window outlets. In this mode,the system will automatically select outside air.Recirculation cannot be selected in floor mode.

The right knob may also be used to select thedefrost and defog mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

240

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn theoutside air mode on. When the button ispressed, an indicator light will come on. When thismode is on, outside air will circulate throughoutthe vehicle. The outside air mode can be used withall modes, but it cannot be used with therecirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will come on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andprevent odors from entering the vehicle.Recirculation may also help cool the air inside thevehicle more quickly once the temperatureinside the vehicle is less than the outsidetemperature.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defog or defrost modes. If recirculation isselected with one of these modes, the indicatorlight will flash three times and then turn off. Whilein recirculation mode the windows may fogwhen the weather is cold and damp. To clear thefog, select either the defog or defrost modeand increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can be turned off bypressing the outside air button, or by turning offthe ignition.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When thisbutton is pressed, an indicator light on the buttonwill come on to let you know the air conditioning isactivated. The air conditioning can be selected inany mode as long as the fan switch is on.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog or frost on the inside of windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. To avoid foggingwindows on rainy and humid days at temperaturesabove freezing, run the air conditioningcompressor. It is best to avoid the use of therecirculation mode, except when maximum A/Cperformance is needed or for short times to avoidexterior odors.

241

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fogor moisture and warm the passengers. The airis directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and sidewindow vents.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly. A portion of theair is directed to the windshield and the sidewindow vents, with some air directed to the floorvents. The system will automatically forceoutside air into the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot be selected in thedefog or defrost mode. When either mode isselected, the system runs the air conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperatureis close to freezing. Do not drive the vehicle untilall the windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has a rear window defogger it usesa warming grid to remove fog from the rearwindow.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light onthe button will come on to let you know thatthe rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN. The rear window defoggerwill stay on for approximately 10 minutes after thebutton is pressed, unless the ignition is turnedto ACC or LOCK. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

242

Climate Control System(Heater Only)With this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

Use the right knob to select from thefollowing modes:

The right knob can be positioned betweentwo modes to select a combination of thosetwo modes.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield, side window outlets, and second rowfloor outlets. In this mode, the system willautomatically select outside air.

243

Defogging and DefrostingFog or frost on the inside of windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fogor moisture and warm the passengers. The airis directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and sidewindow vents.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly. A portion of theair is directed to the windshield and the sidewindow vents, with some air directed to the floorvents. The system will automatically forceoutside air into the vehicle.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system, you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle. The vehiclealso has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

Different climate control settings can be selectedfor the driver and passengers.

244

Driver and Passenger SideTemperature ControlsThe driver and passenger side temperaturebuttons are used to adjust the temperature of theair coming through the system on the driver orpassenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperaturecan be adjusted even if the system is turnedoff. This is possible since outside air always flowsthrough the system as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe cabin temperature. The driver side orpassenger side temperature display shows thetemperature setting decreasing or increasing.

The passenger’s temperature setting can be set tomatch the driver’s temperature setting bypressing the PASS button and turning off thePASS indicator. When the passenger’stemperature setting is set different than thedriver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS buttonilluminates and both the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature displays are shown.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive the system controls the inside temperature,the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display changesto show the current temperature(s) andAUTO is lit on the display. The current airdelivery mode and fan speed are alsodisplayed for about 5 seconds.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet are automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressormay run when the outside temperatureis above freezing. The air inlet will normally beset to outside air. If it is hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switch to therecirculate mode to help quickly cool down theair inside the vehicle. The light on the buttoncomes on in recirculation.

245

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F(23°C) temperature setting and allow about20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use thedriver’s or passenger’s temperature buttons toadjust the temperature setting as necessary. Ifyou choose the temperature setting of 60°F(15°C), the system remains at the maximumcooling setting. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 90°F (32°C), the system remains atthe maximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicle toheat or cool any faster.

Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located onthe top of the instrument panel near the windshield.This sensor regulates air temperature based on sunload. For more information on the solar sensor, see“Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem delays turning the fan on until warm air isavailable. The length of delay depends on theengine coolant temperature. Pressing thefan switch overrides this delay and changes thefan to a selected speed.

O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off theclimate control system. Outside air still enters thevehicle, and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed by pressing the modebutton. Recirculation can be selected onceyou have selected vent or bi-level mode. Thetemperature can also be adjusted using eithertemperature button. If you adjust the air deliverymode or temperature settings with the systemoff, the display illuminates briefly to show you thesettings and then returns to off. Press theon/off button or the up down arrows on the fanswitch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the airconditioning button to turn the system on whenit is off.

Manual OperationYou can manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

DC (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols letyou manually adjust the fan speed. Press D

to increase fan speed and C to decreasefan speed.

246

Pressing either fan button while the system is offturns the system on. Pressing either fan buttonwhile in automatic control places the fanunder manual control. The fan setting remainsdisplayed and the AUTO light turns off. Theair delivery mode remains under automatic control.

HG (Mode): Press H and G to manuallychange the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press either button until the desiredmode appears on the display. Pressing eithermode button while the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turning the systemon. Pressing either mode button while in automaticcontrol places the mode under manual control.

The air delivery mode setting is displayed and theAUTO light turns off. The fan remains underautomatic control.

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directed partly to theinstrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. Alittle air is directed towards the windshield andside window outlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, withsome to the windshield, side window outlets,and second row floor outlets. In this mode, thesystem will automatically select outside air.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” laterin this section.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on. When the button ispressed, an indicator light comes on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andprevent odors from entering the vehicle.Recirculation may also help cool the air inside thevehicle more quickly once the temperature insidethe vehicle is less than the outside temperature.

247

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of those modes, the indicator light flashesthree times and then turns off. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on when this mode isactivated. While in recirculation mode the windowsmay fog when the weather is cold and damp. Toclear the fog, select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can be turned off bypressing the outside air button, or by turning offthe ignition.

; (Outside Air): Press this button to turn onthe outside air mode. When this mode is selected,air from outside the vehicle circulates throughoutthe vehicle. An indicator light on the button comeson to let you know that it is activated. Theoutside air mode can be used with all modes, butit cannot be used with the recirculation mode.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning (A/C) compressor on andoff. When air conditioning is selected, an indicatorlight comes on to let you know that the airconditioning has been activated.

Pressing this button when the outside temperatureis too cool for air conditioning makes the airconditioning indicator flash three times and thenturn off to let you know the air conditioning mode isnot available. If the air conditioning is on andthe outside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for air conditioningto be effective, the air conditioning light turnsoff to let you know the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This helps to reduce thetime it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so you might notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath the vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

248

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, inthe middle of the instrument panel, monitorsthe solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperaturesensor, located in theheadliner, measures thetemperature of the airinside your vehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor reads theoutside air temperature and helps maintain thetemperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on thefront of the vehicle could cause a false reading inthe displayed temperature on the rearview mirror.

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfort settingby adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, andthe air delivery mode. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be used as neededto maintain cool outlet temperatures.

249

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost fromthe windshield.

Use H and G to select the defog ordefrost modes.

- (Defog): Press this button to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly. Thismode directs a portion of the air to the windshieldand side window vents and some to the floorvents. In this mode, the system will automaticallyforce outside air into your vehicle. Therecirculation mode cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is close to freezing. Donot drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): If your vehiclehas this feature, press this button to turn thedefogger on or off. It automatically turns off severalminutes after it has been activated. The defoggercan also be turned off by turning the engineoff. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

250

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

W (Heated Mirrors): If your vehicle has heatedoutside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heatto help clear fog or frost from the surface of themirror when the rear window defog button ispressed. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 181.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center andon the side of the instrument panel to directthe airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction, such asleaves. The heater and defroster will workbetter, reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of your windows.

• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, setthe fan speed to maximum airflow for a fewmoments before driving. This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the insideof your windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of thevehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, canaffect the performance of the heating and airconditioning system. Check with yourdealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

251

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. Ifyou are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with warning lights andgages. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 285 for more information.

252

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to knowto drive safely and economically. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®

Diesel manual for more information.

United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar.

253

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Engine Hour Meter DisplayThe Driver Information Center (DIC) can alsodisplay the number of hours the engine has run.To display the engine hours, turn the ignitionoff, press and hold the reset button for at leastfour seconds. The hour meter will be displayed forup to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turnedon. See DIC Operation and Displays (WithDIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281for more information.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

Press the reset button, located on the instrumentpanel cluster next to the voltmeter, to togglebetween the trip odometer and the regularodometer. Holding the reset button forapproximately one second while the tripodometer is displayed will reset it.

To display the odometer reading with the ignitionoff, press the reset button.

See DIC Operation and Displays (With DICButtons) on page 274 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281 formore information.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm). See “Grade Braking(Allison Transmission®)” under Tow/Haul Modeon page 152 for more information.

254

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will sound for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driversafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLight (1500 Series)Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt light will alsocome on and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 258 for more information.

255

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module and, ifequipped, the passenger sensing system. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 89.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while you aredriving, the airbag system may not be workingproperly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

Airbag Off LightIf your vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it alsohas a passenger airbag status indicator locatedin the overhead console.

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbagstatus indicator ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, will light for several seconds as a systemcheck. Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,will light to let you know the status of the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag.

When you manually turn the right front passenger’sairbag off using the airbag on-off switch in theglove box, the indicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on to remind you that theairbag has been turned off.


256

This light will go off when you turn the airbag on.See Airbag Off Switch on page 100 for moreon this, including important safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag isturned off for a person who is not in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment, that person will not have theextra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there.

Do not turn off the passenger’s airbagunless the person sitting there is in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 100 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comeson when you have turned off the airbag, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. The right frontpassenger’s airbag could inflate eventhough the switch is off. If this everhappens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk groupsit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 100 and Airbag Readiness Light onpage 256 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

257

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it meansthat the right front passenger’s frontal airbagis enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Switch onpage 100 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

If, after several seconds, both status indicatorlights remain on, or if there are no lights atall, there may be a problem with the lights or theairbag on-off switch. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorIf your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,your overhead console will have a passengerairbag status indicator.

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, oreither the on or off symbol to let you know the statusof the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).


258

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 103 for more onthis, including important safety information.

259

If, after several seconds, both status indicatorlights remain on, or if there are no lights atall, there may be a problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 256 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

If this light comes onwhen the engine isrunning, there could bea problem with thecharging system.

This light will also stay on while the key is in RUNuntil the engine is started.

If the light stays on after starting the engine itcould indicate a problem with the generator drivebelt, or some other charging system problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

If you must drive a short distance with this lighton, it helps to turn off all of the electricalaccessories, such as the radio and the blower.

260

Voltmeter Gage

Your vehicle may havea voltmeter gage.

When the ignition is in RUN, this gage indicatesthe battery voltage.

When the engine is running, this gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The gagemay transition from a higher to lower or a lower tohigher reading, this is normal. If the vehicle isoperating outside the normal operating range, thecharging system light will come on. See ChargingSystem Light on page 260 for more information.The voltmeter gage may also read lower when infuel economy mode. This is normal.

Readings outside the normal operating range mayalso occur when a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in the vehicle and theengine is left idling for an extended period.This condition is normal since the charging systemis not able to provide full power at engine idle.As engine speeds are increased, this conditionshould correct itself as higher engine speeds allowthe charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with thereadings outside the normal operating range. Ifyou must drive, turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings outside the normal operating rangeindicate a possible problem in the electricalsystem. Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

261

Brake System Warning LightWith the ignition on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set the parking brake.If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged,a chime will sound when the vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and a chimesounds there could be a brake problem. Haveyour brake system inspected right away.

This light may also come on due to low brakefluid. See Brakes on page 535 for moreinformation.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 443.


262

Antilock Brake SystemWarning Light

For vehicles with theAntilock Brake System(ABS), this light willcome on briefly whenyou start the engine.

That is normal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if thelight comes on when you are driving, stop assoon as it is safely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light still stays on, or comes onagain while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warning light isnot on, you still have brakes, but you do nothave antilock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you do not haveantilock brakes and there is a problem with yourregular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 262

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center(DIC), see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 285 for all brake related DIC messages.

263

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

If equipped, this warninglight should come onbriefly when the engineis started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®

system is active.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of timewhen the system is turned on, your vehicle needsservice. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of how hard yourvehicle is working. During a majority of theoperation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) orless. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it isnormal for the temperature to fluctuate and goover the 235°F (113°C) mark. However, if the gagereaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating on page 523.


264

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will accompanythe light. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 285 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 558 for moreinformation.

This light will flash for approximately 60 secondsand then stay on if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 569for more information.

265

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well, your vehicle’sfuel economy might not be as good, and theengine might not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs that might not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 494.

266

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 500.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

267

Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 497. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

268

Oil Pressure Gage

Your vehicle may have an engine oil pressuregage. It shows the engine oil pressure in psi(pounds per square inch) when the engine isrunning. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure inkPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but if readingsare outside the normal operating range, the oilpressure light will come on. See Oil Pressure Lighton page 270 for more information.

A reading outside the normal operating range maybe caused by a dangerously low oil level orsome other problem causing low oil pressure.Check your oil as soon as possible. See“OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 285 and Engine Oil (GasolineEngine) on page 508.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


269

Oil Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startyour engine.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

That is a check to be sure the light works. If itdoes not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it willbe there to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engineproperly. You could be low on oil and you mighthave some other system problem.

Security LightThis light flashes whenthe vehicle securitysystem is activated.

270

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 230 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 224 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 220 for more information.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drivelight comes on whenyou shift a manualtransfer case intofour-wheel drive and thefront axle engages.

Some delay between the shifting and the lightcoming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 for moreinformation.

271

Tow/Haul Mode LightThis light comes onwhen the Tow/Haulmode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode onpage 152.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you areout of fuel, and you should get more fuel assoon as possible.

When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage will appear. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 285 for more information.

Here are some situations you may experience withyour fuel gage. None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe fuel gage indicated. For example, thegage may have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.

If you have a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gage” inthe Diesel Engine Supplement.


272

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under the fuelgage, will come onbriefly when youare starting the engine.

This light and a chime will come on when the fueltank is low on fuel. There will also be a “FUELLEVEL LOW” message on the Driver InformationCenter, see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 285 for more information. When you add fuelthis light and message should go off. If it doesnot, have your vehicle serviced.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle. Italso displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated below the tachometer in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DICOperation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 295 for the displaysavailable.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons,see “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons)” later in this section for thedisplays available.

273

DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the informationbelow explains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 295 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also usethe trip odometer reset stem to view some ofthe DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are thetrip/fuel, vehicleinformation,customization, andset/reset buttons. Thebutton functionsare detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, and transmissiontemperature. Some vehicles also displayinstantaneous economy and an Active FuelManagement™ indicator.

274

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, units, tire pressure readingsfor vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, trailer brake gain and output informationfor vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, engine hours, TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system programming forvehicles with a TPM system, and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 295 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the odometer.

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “Units” later in this section.

Trip OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distance traveled ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for the trip odometer. Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will also display the tripodometer.

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressingthe set/reset button while the trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset the trip odometerwhile it is displayed by pressing and holdingthe trip odometer reset stem.

275

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)before it is started again, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, the display will show5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling. Thedisplay will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if drivingconditions change. For example, if driving in trafficand making frequent stops, this display mayread one number, but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This isbecause different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economy than citydriving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

276

Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold the set/reset button.

Fuel UsedPress the trip/fuel button until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the set/reset buttonwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

TimerPress the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed since thetimer was last reset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to be counted as longas the ignition is on, even if another displayis being shown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the displaywill return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theset/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

Transmission TemperaturePress the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMPdisplays. This display shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

277

Instantaneous Economy and Active FuelManagement™ IndicatorIf your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuelbutton until INST ECONOMY V8 MODEdisplays. This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditions change. Thisdisplay shows the instantaneous fuel economy inmiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike averageeconomy, this screen cannot be reset.

An Active Fuel Management™ indicator willdisplay on the right side of the DIC, whileINST ECONOMY displays on the left side. ActiveFuel Management™ allows the engine tooperate on either four or eight cylinders, dependingon your driving demands. When Active FuelManagement™ is active, V4 MODE will display onthe DIC. When Active Fuel Management™ isinactive, V8 MODE will display. See Active FuelManagement™ on page 145 for more information.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert you to change youroil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 285. Youshould change your oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508. Inaddition to the engine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) onpage 633 for more information.

278

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oil change. Toreset the engine oil life system, see Engine OilLife System on page 511.

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

Tire PressureIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, the pressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shownin either pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until the DIC displaysREAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 567 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 285 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Trailer Gain and OutputOn vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, the trailer brake displayappears in the DIC. Press the vehicle informationbutton until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. Thissetting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 witheither a trailer connected or disconnected.To adjust this setting, see “Integrated TrailerBrake Control System” under Towing a Trailer onpage 449 for more information.

279

OUTPUT shows the power output to the traileranytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected.Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display. See“Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” underTowing a Trailer on page 449 for more information.

Engine HoursPress the vehicle information button until ENGINEHOURS displays. This display shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Relearn Tire PositionsIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, after rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tirepositions. To re-learn the tire positions, seeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 569. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 574 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 285 for moreinformation.

Relearn Remote KeyThis display allows you to match Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To matchan RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to LOCK.

280

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons)If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, theinformation below explains the operation ofthis system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, youcan use the trip odometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, engine hours,trip odometer, transmission temperature, trailerbrake gain and output information for vehicles with

the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC)system, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system programming for vehicles with a TPMsystem, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, and display language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use thetrip odometer reset stem to view the followingdisplays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,and display language.

Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu ItemsOdometerPress the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

Engine HoursTo display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignitionin LOCK or ACCESSORY, then press and holdthe trip odometer reset stem for four seconds whileviewing the ODOMETER. This display showsthe total number of hours the engine has run.

281

Trip OdometerPress the trip odometer reset stem until TRIPdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressingand holding the trip odometer reset stem whilethe trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers) drivensince the ignition was last turned on. This can beused if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer will display thenumber of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned on and thevehicle was moving. Once the vehicle beginsmoving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.

For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

Transmission TemperaturePress the trip odometer reset stem until TRANSTEMP displays. This display shows the temperatureof the automatic transmission fluid in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

Trailer Gain and OutputOn vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, the trailer brake displayappears in the DIC. Press the trip odometer resetstem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. Thissetting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 witheither a trailer connected or disconnected.

282

To adjust this setting, see “Integrated TrailerBrake Control System” under Towing a Trailer onpage 449 for more information.

OUTPUT shows the power output to the traileranytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected.Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display. See“Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” underTowing a Trailer on page 449 for more information.

Oil LifeTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem untilOIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining usefullife. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system will alert you tochange your oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 285. Youshould change your oil as soon as you can.

See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508. Inaddition to the engine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) onpage 633 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oil change. Toreset the engine oil life system, see Engine OilLife System on page 511.

Relearn Tire PositionsTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). If your vehicle has a Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system, after rotating the tires orafter replacing a tire or sensor, the systemmust re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 569. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 574 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 285 for more information.

283

Relearn Remote KeyTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to yourvehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until

RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem

for three seconds.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to LOCK.

LanguageThis display allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear. To selecta language, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETER display, pressand hold the trip odometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currently set languagedisplays.

3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometerreset stem to scroll through all of the availablelanguages.The available languages are ENGLISH(default), FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL(Spanish), and NO CHANGE.

4. Once the desired language is displayed,release the trip odometer reset stem toset your choice.

284

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel or the trip odometerreset stem on the instrument panel clusterto acknowledge that you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when the engine oil needsto be changed. When you change the engineoil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 511 for information on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)on page 508 and Scheduled Maintenance(Gasoline Engine) on page 633 for moreinformation.

285

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays when thepressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needto be checked. This message also displaysLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, orRIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 558, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 428, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tiresby pressing the vehicle information button. See“DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”earlier in this section. If the tire pressure islow, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 265.

CHECK TRAILER WIRINGOn vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, this message may displayand a chime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:

• A trailer with electric brakes becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicleis stopped, this message clears itselfafter a short time.

− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicleis moving, this message stays on untilthe ignition is turned off.

• There is a short in the wiring to the electrictrailer brakes.

When this message displays, power is no longeravailable to the trailer brakes.

286

As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull yourvehicle over to the side of the road and turnthe ignition off. Check the wiring connection to thetrailer and turn the ignition back on. Thismessage clears if the trailer is reconnected. Thismessage also clears if you acknowledge it. Ifthis message still displays, either your vehicle orthe trailer needs service. See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”under Towing a Trailer on page 449 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicleis in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the message still appearson the DIC.

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)TURNED OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 264. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILIf your vehicle has an oil level sensor, thismessage displays if the oil level in the vehicle islow. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition to be surethis message clears. See Engine Oil (GasolineEngine) on page 508 for additional information.

287

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 523 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 264.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode (V8 Engines Only) on page 526 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 523 for moreinformation.

This message displays and a chime sounds if theengine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This message clears when theengine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe cooling system temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters the engine coolantprotection mode. See Engine Overheating onpage 523 for further information.

This message also displays when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

288

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chime sounds if thefuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 272 and Fuel on page 496for more information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and closethe hood again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)This message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508for more information.

This message displays if low oil pressure levelsoccur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the cause of the lowoil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil assoon as possible and have your vehicle servicedby your dealer. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)on page 508.

289

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has beenstarted, this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system has been turned off.Press the set/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem to acknowledge this message and clearit from the DIC display. To turn the URPAsystem back on, see Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 234.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 119 and DIC Operationand Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 274 orDIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 281 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays if a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The batteryneeds to be replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 119.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)This message displays and a chime sounds ifthe passenger’s side rear door is not fully closedand the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the door again. Check tosee if the message still appears on the DIC.

290

SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVEThis message displays if a problem occurs withthe four-wheel-drive system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again when you begindriving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service.See your dealer.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your dealer inspectthe system for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 256 and Airbag System on page 89for more information.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEMOn some vehicles, this message displays if thereis a problem with the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, the charging system lightmay also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 260.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soon as possible.See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along with the brakesystem warning light if there is a problem with thebrake system. See Brake System WarningLight on page 262. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service as soon as possible.See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKES SOONThis message displays if there is a problem withthe brake system. If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restartthe vehicle and check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service. See your dealer.

291

SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this message displaysif there is a problem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help you park. SeeUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 234 for more information. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this messagedisplays, it means there may be a problem with theStabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try toreset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for atleast 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it means there is aproblem. You should see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do nothave the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduce yourspeed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may ormay not restart so you may want to take the

vehicle to your dealer before turning off theengine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation onpage 137 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. If you drive yourvehicle while any of the four sensors are missing orinoperable, the warning comes on in about20 minutes. A sensor would be missing, forexample, if you put different wheels on your vehiclewithout transferring the sensors. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there may be a problemwith the TPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when there is a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385for more information.

292

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMOn vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, this message displays anda chime sounds when there is a problem withthe ITBC system.When this message displays, power is no longeravailable to the trailer brakes.As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull yourvehicle over to the side of the road and turnthe ignition off. Check the wiring connection to thetrailer and turn the ignition back on. If thismessage still displays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See your dealer.See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”under Towing a Trailer on page 449 for moreinformation.

STABILITRAK OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or whenthe stability control has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However,you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want

to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-road conditions andrequire more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426. Toturn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 385.

There are several conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.

• One condition is overheating, which couldoccur if StabiliTrak® activates continuouslyfor an extended period of time.

• The message also displays if the brakesystem warning light is on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 262.

• The message could display if the stabilitysystem takes longer than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to driving conditions.

• The message displays if an engine or vehiclerelated problem has been detected and thevehicle needs service. See your dealer.

• The message also displays if the vehicle isshifted into 4LO.

The message turns off as soon as the conditionsthat caused the message to be displayed areno longer present.

293

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display along with the checkengine light on the instrument panel cluster ifthe vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 266.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank onpage 500. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turn thislight and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle.See DIC Operation and Displays (With DICButtons) on page 274 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281 formore information. The tire positions must bere-learned after rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 574, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 569, and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 567 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when the Traction Control System (TCS)is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 385 for moreinformation.

TRAILER CONNECTEDOn vehicles with the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, this message displaysbriefly when a trailer with electric brakes isfirst connected to the vehicle.

This message clears itself after several seconds.This message also clears if you acknowledgeit. After this message clears, the TRAILERGAIN/OUTPUT display appears in the DIC.

See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DICOperation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) onpage 274 or DIC Operation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 281 and “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” under Towing aTrailer on page 449 for more information.

294

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe transmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,you can damage the transmission. This couldlead to costly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle with overheated transmission fluidor while the transmission temperature warningis displayed.

This message displays along with a continuouschime if the transmission fluid in the vehiclegets hot. Driving with the transmission fluidtemperature high can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow thetransmission to cool. This message clears andthe chime stops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to theoff position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 506 for thelocation of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 533for more information.

DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

295

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to scrollthrough the available customizable options.

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until the PRESS V

TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/reset button once todisplay all DIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

296

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

You can also change the language by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section for more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 126for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.



297

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature. Italso allows you to select which doors andwhen the doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 126for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 119 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

298

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 119 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



299

DELAY DOOR LOCKOn vehicles with a crew cab, this feature allows youto select whether or not the locking of the vehicle’sdoors will be delayed. When locking the doors withthe power door lock switch and a door is open,this feature will delay locking the doors untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You can temporarilyoverride delayed locking by pressing the powerdoor lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice. See Delayed Locking onpage 126 for more information.

Press the customization button until DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed.



EXIT LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select the amount oftime you want the exterior lamps to remainon when it is dark enough outside. This happensafter the key is turned from RUN to LOCK.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.

300



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 119 for more information.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

301

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to aloud level.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside PowerFoldaway Mirrors on page 182 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



302

EASY EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the automatic easy exitseat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals on page 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recallwill occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in theignition and remove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless a memoryrecall took place prior to removing the key again.


Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the remote memory seatrecall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals on page 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recallwill occur.

303

ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, theoutside mirrors will automatically move to thestored driving position when the unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed. On some vehicles with the adjustablethrottle and brake pedal feature, the pedalswill also automatically move. See “Relearn RemoteKey” under DIC Operation and Displays (WithDIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281for more information on matching transmitters todriver ID numbers.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote VehicleStart″ under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 119 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



304

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.

Press the customization button until PRESS V TOEXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

305

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 378. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

306

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer/retailer.Also, check federal rules covering mobile radioand telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment can interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 141 for more information.

Setting the TimeAM-FM Radio with Optional CD PlayerIf your vehicle has an AM/FM radio with anoptional CD player, it has a clock button for settingthe time. With these types of radios, the clockcan be set with either the radio turned on or off.Set the time by following these steps:1. Press the clock button until the hour numbers

begin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers begin flashing on the display. Pressthe clock button a third time and the 12HRor 24HR time format begins flashing.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio faceplate,clockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the time. While the 12HR or24HR time format is flashing, turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to selectthe default time settings.

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

307

MP3 Radios with a Single CD or aSingle CD and DVD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or aCD and DVD player, it has a clock button forsetting the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow the instructions:

1. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

3. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.

Changing the Time and DateDefault SettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hours to 24 hours or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowthat is currently displayed on the radio screenuntil the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),and the date MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

308

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays, press the pushbuttonlocated under that label. The HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the time or date setting labels thatyou want to change. Every time thepushbutton is pressed again, the time or thedate if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

3. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.

Changing the Time and DateDefault SettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hours to 24 hours or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings, followthese instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays, press the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrow that iscurrently displayed on the radio screen untilthe 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and thedate MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM(day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the MENU button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

309

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volumelevel that was last set. The volume can beadjusted using the volume knob.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

H (Clock): Your vehicle has a clock button forsetting the time. With this type of radio, the clockcan be set with either the radio turned on or off. SeeSetting the Time on page 307 for more information.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thestation frequency.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrowfor two seconds until a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. The station frequencyflashes while the radio is in the scan mode. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

310

The radio seeks and scans stations only with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan presets within the current selected band,press and hold either seek arrow for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds. The radio goes to astored preset, plays for a few seconds if a strongsignal is present, then goes to the next storedpreset. The station frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble, pressthe tune knob or the EQ button until the desiredtone control label displays. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. The display shows thecurrent bass or treble level. If a station’s frequencyis weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance orfade, press this button or the tune knob until thedesired speaker control label displays. Turnthe tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the setting.

The setting can also be adjusted by pressing theseek arrows.

Radio Messages

Loc (Locked): This message displays while theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

311

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio



When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volumelevel that was last set. The volume can beadjusted by using the volume knob.

H (Clock): Your vehicle has a clock button forsetting the time. With this type of radio, the clockcan be set with either the radio turned on oroff. See Setting the Time on page 307 for moreinformation.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for two seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. The stationfrequency flashes while the radio is in the scanmode. Press either SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.


312

To scan presets within the current selected band,press and hold either seek arrow for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds. The radio goes toa stored preset, plays for a few seconds if a strongsignal is present, then goes to the next storedpreset. The station frequency flashes whilethe radio is in the scan mode.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press and hold one of the six numbered

pushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob button or theEQ pushbutton until the desired tone control labeldisplays. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thesetting. The display shows the current bassor treble level. If a station’s frequency is weak, orif there is static, decrease the treble.

Unique BASS/TREB settings can be saved foreach source.


` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting. The setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward), or REV (reverse) buttons.

313

Radio Messages

Loc (Locked): This message displays while theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.


Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe radio display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 374 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

314

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this pushbutton to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, the CDtracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from theCD you are listening to in random order.The random icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off randomplay. The random icon disappears fromthe display.

RPT (Repeat): Press and release the RPT buttonto repeat the track you are listening to. Anarrow symbol displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

315

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

CD Messages

ERR (Error): If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

NO: This message displays if the EJECT orCD/AUX buttons are pressed and a CD has notbeen inserted into the player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reportingthe problem.

316

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 378 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the car speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need todo additional volume adjustments from theportable device if the volume is not loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, the message NO displays.

317

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radio istuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name orcall letters display. In rare cases, a radio stationcould broadcast incorrect information that causesthe radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD similar

318

Playing the Radio



Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise asdriving speed changes. That way, the volume levelshould sound about the same as you drive.To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO

VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selectiondisplays.


© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.


319

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) might appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton positioned under anyone of the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

When information is not available, NoInfo displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 378.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

320

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned under

the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. The highlighted setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desiredlevels are obtained. If a station’s frequency isweak or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. The choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQsettings are either MANUAL or TALK.

321


BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. The highlighted settingcan also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

322

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly and yourvehicle must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 357 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

323

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. While the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays. When more thanone CD is in the radio, the desired CD to be playedcan be changed by pressing the pushbuttonslocated under the displayed Disc label.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 374 for more information.


324


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have played. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If eitherSEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,the player continues moving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

325

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button. Abeep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into theslot of the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the disc and/or tracknumber displays when a CD is in the player. Pressthis button again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, No Input Device Found displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscIf you have a radio with a single CD (MP3)or a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

326

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.



• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,or cassette tape player, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.


To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

327

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume of the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might be needed from theportable device if the volume does not go loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Input Device Found displays.

Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment System on page 359 formore information on the vehicle’s RSE system.The DVD player is the top slot on the radiofaceplate. The player is capable of reading theDTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Videomedia, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround aretrademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).Dolby® is manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

328

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise asdriving speed changes. That way, the volume levelshould sound about the same as you drive. Toactivate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO

VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV

setting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) toselect the level of radio volume compensation.The display times out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

329

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.


© SEEK ¨: Press the left or right SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.


4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) couldappear. Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label is displayed.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to yourfavorite stations using the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has them.See Defensive Driving on page 378.

330

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

331

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): Toadjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. If a station’sfrequency is weak or if there is static, decreasethe treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. The choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQsettings are either MANUAL or TALK.


BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. The highlighted setting canalso be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until thedesired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. Abeep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to themiddle position at one time, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radiodisables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.

332

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.Another way to navigate the category listis to press the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

333

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 357 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying (loading a disc into the system, dependingon media type and format ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource. The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upperslot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is theCD deck) of the radio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CDsymbol appears on the left side of the radiodisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD.

334

If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, seeCare of Your CDs and DVDs on page 374 formore information.



Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD that is currently playingin the bottom slot. A beep sounds and EjectingDisc displays. Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD can be removed. If theCD is not removed, after several seconds, the CDautomatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD that is currently playingin the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays. Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CDis not removed, after several seconds, the CDautomatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

335

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD have played. If less thanfive seconds on the CD have played, theprevious track plays. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With random, tracks can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order.To play the tracks from the CD, press theDVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD,or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDMlabel displays. Press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. The CD orDVD remains inside the radio for future listeningor for viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Pressthis button again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

336

If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slotthe DVD/CD AUX button cycles between thetwo sources and not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through allavailable options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359 formore information.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rearseat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remote control.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard through thespeakers at one time. An audio source isdefined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on. Theradio can be heard through all of the vehiclespeakers.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or theDVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sfront auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 359 for more information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscA radio with CD and DVD has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” inthe index.

337

CD MessagesIf these messages displays and/or the CD comesout, it could be for one of the following reasons:

Optical Error: The disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with aninvalid or unknown format.

Player Error: There are disc LOAD or discEJECT problems.• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.



• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe remote control or by the buttons on the radiofaceplate. See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment System on page 359 for moreinformation.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 359 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

338

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button cycles between thetwo sources and not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through allavailable options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359 formore information.

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on oroff. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume. Press and holdthe knob for more than two seconds to turn off theentire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system and to start the parental control feature.Parental control prevents the rear seat occupantfrom operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) systemor remote control.

A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.The parental control feature remains on until thisbutton is pressed and held for more thantwo seconds again, or until the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on aCD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or tochange clock or date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See the informationgiven earlier in this section specific to the radio,CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Time” inthe index, for setting the clock and date.

339

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to go to the next track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quicklyreverse the CD or DVD at five times the normalspeed. The radio displays the elapsed time while infast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press thisbutton again. This button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays theelapsed time and fast forwards five times thenormal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD orDVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,the player automatically pulls it back in after15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, because of an unknown format, etc.,and the disc fails to eject, press and hold theCD eject button for more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-Vmenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 359 for moreinformation. The Video Screen automatically turnson when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.

340

r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displays on the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restarting playback of aDVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press theplay button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after the previews havefinished, although there might be a delay of upto 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playingthe movie automatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause symbol tag displayedon the radio. If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button todisplay directional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when a DVD is playingand a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing. Pressthe pushbuttons located under any desired tagoption during DVD playback. See the tag optionslisted below for more information.

341

The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-Amenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 359 for moreinformation. The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when the DVD-A isinserted into the DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displays on the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restarting playback of aDVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press this button to cycle throughmusical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button todisplay directional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cyclethrough audio stream formats located on theDVD-A disc. There is not any type of notificationfor the customer to see through the radiodisplay, but VSM has a text field that showsaudio stream changing.

Inserting a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playermight not accept some paper labeled media. Theplayer starts loading the disc into the systemand show “Loading Disc” on the radio display. Atthe same time, the radio displays a softkeymenu of option(s). Some discs automatically playthe movie while others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires the Play, Enter, orNavigation softkeys to be pressed; either bysoftkey or by the rear seat passenger using theremote control.

Loading a disc into the system, depending onmedia type and format, ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD.

342

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CDAUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resumeplay from where it last stopped if the disc has notbeen ejected and the stop button has not beenpressed twice on the remote control. If the disc hasbeen ejected or the stop button has been pressedtwice on the remote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject thedisc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, butnot removed, the radio reloads the disc after ashort period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.

The radio does not resume play of the discautomatically. If the RSA system is sourced to theDVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVDplayer begins to play again. In case loading andreading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,press and hold the DVD Eject button morethan five seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This message displays when thereare disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUXbutton is pressed on the radio.

343

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)The radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,or cassette tape player, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.


To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch(3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. While a device is connected, the radioautomatically begins playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary inputover the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux buttonon the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screenmust be on in order for the radio to source to rearauxiliary.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additional volumeadjustments might be needed from the portabledevice if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this buttonto cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label anda message showing track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slotthe DVD/CD AUX button cycles between thetwo sources and not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

344

If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAuxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later inthis section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359for more information.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD orSix-Disc CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumare available for display by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows theMP3 label on the left side of the screen but playsboth file formats in the order in which theywere recorded to the disc.

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, anda combined total of 512 folders and files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

345

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up toeight subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlistsor sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc mightcause the disc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by using the previousand next folder buttons, the tuner knob, orthe seek buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RWthat was recorded can also be played using nofile folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists,and a combined total of 512 folders and files,the player lets you access and navigate up to themaximum, but all items over the maximum arenot accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas the CD label. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

If a disc contains both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder underthe root directory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

346

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not display on a CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded without folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, allfiles are located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons search playlists(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

347

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMAInsert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot(Single CD Player), or press the load button andwait for the message to insert disc (Six-DiscCD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in,and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R orCD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can bean increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. Ifthese problems occur, check the bottom surface ofthe CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CDdoes not play properly. If the surface of the CD issoiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs onpage 374 for more information.

348



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing, press and releasethis button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. Ifthe CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after

several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automaticallypulls back into the player and begins playing. Forthe Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3/WMA file, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backwardor forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMAfile. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

349

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release this button to resume playing thefile. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order,on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:

• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R orCD-RW in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn off random play.

• To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album. Pressthe pushbutton located below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc to sort the filesby artist and album ID3 tag information. Itmight take several minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of MP3/WMA filesrecorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio canbegin playing while it is scanning the disc inthe background. When the scan is finished, theCD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3/WMA files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second lineof the display between the arrows. Once allsongs by that artist are played, the player movesto the next artist in alphabetical order on theCD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMAfiles by that artist. To listen to MP3/WMA filesby another artist, press the pushbutton locatedbelow either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist is displayed.

350

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins to play. Onceall songs from that album are played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order onthe CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMAfiles from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD andDVD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and album displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode DiscsThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores theMP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressed audio format, thedefault being the uncompressed format (.CDA).

351

MP3/WMA FormatIf an MP3/WMA disc is burned on a personalcomputer:• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded

on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA

files on one disc.• Make sure the CD player (lower slot) is able

to read and play a maximum combination of512 files and folders. The DVD player(upper slot) is able to read 255 folders,15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up toeight subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wplor .pls extension as other file extensionsmay not work.

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Tryingto add music to an existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root folders or files.

352

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded without folders or playlists. Whendisplaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, allfiles are located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons search playlists(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.When the radio displays the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. After the last track ofthe last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. After the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

353

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of thefilename displays.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the topor bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkeymenu appears and allows navigation of the disc.The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomizesong play order), a Folder icon with left and rightarrows (to move up or down through availablefolders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available,and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag isshown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkeyonly or the menu as previously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R orCD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

354

Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button toeject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying in the bottom slot. A sound is heard andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R or CD-RWautomatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold this button formore than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release thisbutton to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that iscurrently playing in the top slot. A sound is heardand Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R orCD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RWis not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold this button formore than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3/WMA file, if morethan five seconds have played. If less thanfive seconds have played, the previous MP3/WMAfile plays. Press the right SEEK arrow to go tothe next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through theMP3/WMA files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMAfile. A sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

355

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release this button to resume playing thefile. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order.To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RWyou are listening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album. Pressthe pushbutton located below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc to sort the filesby artist and album ID3 tag information. Itmight take several minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of MP3/WMA filesrecorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.

To cancel music navigator while the player isscanning, press the pushbutton located below themusic navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it is scanning thedisc in the background. When the scan is finished,the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. If you wantto listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrow button.The disc goes to the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continue pressing either buttonuntil the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album nameis displayed on the second line between the arrowsand songs from the current album begin to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files from that album.

356

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVDremains inside the radio for future listening orviewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number displays when adisc is in either slot. Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVDslot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and not indicate “No AuxInput Device”. If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles throughall available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, RearSeat Entertainment System on page 359 for moreinformation.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rearseat operator can turn on the video screen and usethe remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)through the remote control.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): Thesechannels, or any others, can be blockedat a customer’s request, by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption code in thereceiver is being updated, and no action isrequired. This process should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system is functioningcorrectly, but the vehicle is in a location that isblocking the XM™ signal. When you move into anopen area, the signal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action isneeded. This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel is not currentlyin service. Tune to another channel.

357

Channel Unavail: This previously assignedchannel is no longer assigned. Tune to anotherstation. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artist information is availableat this time on this channel. The system is workingproperly.

No Title Info: No song title information isavailable at this time on this channel. The systemis working properly.

No CAT Info: No category information is availableat this time on this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text or informationalmessages are available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found: There are no channels availablefor the selected category. The system is workingproperly.

XM TheftLocked: The XM™ receiver in thevehicle could have previously been in anothervehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage appears after having your vehicleserviced, check with your dealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this messagealternates with the XM™ Radio eight digit radioID label. This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message is received whentuned to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If this message does notclear within a short period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver couldhave a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

358

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio. The RSEsystem includes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control. See Radio withCD and DVD (MP3) on page 328 for moreinformation on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system might not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. The operatingrange for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature ofyour vehicle is outside of this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system could have a Parental Controlfeature, depending on the radio. The ParentalControl feature turns off the video screen and RearSeat Audio (RSA). This feature also disables allbutton operations from the remote control andall audio button operations from the RSA.This feature can be used to gain the attention ofthe rear passengers that are using headphones.

359

To enable Parental Control, press and hold theradio power button for more than two seconds. Ifon, the radio, video screen, and RSA turnsoff. If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it stops. WhileParental Control is on, either a padlock icon ora text message comes on, depending on the radio.When the radio is turned back on, the RSEsystem remains in Parental Control.

To turn off Parental Control, press and hold theradio power button for more than two seconds. Thevideo screen and RSA returns to the state theywere in before Parental Control was turned on andif the padlock icon is on the display, it disappears.

Parental Control is also turned off by insertingor ejecting a disc, by pressing the play icon on theradio DVD display menu, or when the ignition isturned off.

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channel wirelessheadphones that are dedicated to this system.These headphones are used to listen to media suchas CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary inputjack, if your vehicle has this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button, channel1/2 switch, and a volume control.

360

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphonescomes on. If the light does not come on,the batteries might need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to Off whennot in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the videoscreen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections.

Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of theRSE overhead console. The headphones shutoff automatically to save the battery power if theRSE system and RSA are shut off or if theheadphones are out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. While wearingthe headphones, if you move too far forward orstep out of the vehicle, they can lose theaudio signal.

The headphones automatically turn off afterfour hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)appears on the upper left side, above the ear padand should be positioned on the left ear. Thesymbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached to the headphonesbecome worn or damaged, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone set. Referto your dealer/retailer for more information.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

361

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries on the headphones, dothe following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver toloosen the battery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slide the batterydoor open.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floorconsole, allow audio or video signals to beconnected from an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit to the RSEsystem. Adapter connectors or cables could berequired to connect the auxiliary device to the A/Vjacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructionsfor proper usage.The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B)is for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for theright audio input.Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.

362

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If thevideo screen is in the DVD player mode, pressingthe AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote controlswitches the video screen from the DVDplayer mode to the auxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connected auxiliarydevice by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CDand DVD (MP3) on page 328 for more information.

How to Change the RSE Video ScreenSettingsThe screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),screen brightness, and setup menu languagecan be changed from the on screen setup menu.To change any feature, do the following:

1. Press the display menu button on theremote control.

2. Use the remote control menu navigationarrows and the enter button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the display menu button again toremove the setup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs canbe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rearseat audio system, if your vehicle has thisfeature.

The RSE system always transmits the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

The DVD player is capable of outputting audio tothe wired headphone jacks on the RSA system,if your vehicle has this feature. The DVDplayer can be selected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) onpage 370 for more information.

363

While a device is connected to the A/V jacks, orthe radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehiclehas this feature, the rear seat passengers are ableto hear audio from the auxiliary device throughthe wireless or wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen to playback fromthis device through the vehicle speakers byselecting AUX as the source on the radio.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on the RSEoverhead console.

2. move the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to itslocked position, the screen remains on, this isnormal, and the DVD continues to play through theprevious audio source. Use the remote controlpower button or eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The RSE overhead console contains the infraredreceivers for the wireless headphones and theinfrared receivers for the remote control. They arelocated at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

364

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries might need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line of sight couldalso affect the function of the remote control.If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot,the remote control power button can be used toturn on the video screen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the video screendisplay. See Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) onpage 328 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight can damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, anew universal remote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure the universalremote control uses a code set of Toshiba®.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlightautomatically times out after seven to ten secondsif no other button is pressed.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD. This function couldvary for each disc.

365

y (Main Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when the display menuor a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

While the DVD is playing, the DVD can be playedslowly by pressing the pause button thenpressing the fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow play mode. Also,reverse can be played slowly by pressingthe pause button and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow play mode, pressthe play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. This button might notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work while the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

366

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quicklyreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversinga DVD video, press the play button. To stop fastreversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastforwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction varies for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function varies for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to change cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature while aDVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function varies for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater thannine. Press this button before entering the number.

367

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure they are installed correctly usingthe diagram on the inside of the remotecontrol.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

turned on or in accessory.The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on the topand bottom or on bothsides or it looksstretched out.

Check the display modesettings in the setup menuby pressing the displaymenu button on theremote control.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliaryinput connections atboth devices.

The remote control doesnot work.

Check to make sure thereis no obstruction betweenthe remote control and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player,I push Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where I leftoff and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player resumesplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressed twotimes the DVD playerbegins to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

368

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are oncorrectly using the L (left)and R (right) on theheadphones.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer/retailerfor assistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends on theradio that is in the vehicle. The video screencan display one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displayswhen there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT button is pressedon the radio.

369

DVD DistortionVideo distortion can occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, orwalkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the music sources: radio,CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,the rear seat passengers can only control themusic sources the front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radios wheredual control is allowed). For example, rear seatpassengers can control a CD and listen to itthrough the headphones, while the driver listens tothe radio through the front speakers. The rearseat passengers have control of the volumefor each set of headphones.

The RSA functions can be used even while themain radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

Depending on the audio system, the rear speakersmay continue to play when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

370

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA onor off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones and theright knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, orXM™ (if equipped), press the seek up or the seekdown arrow to go to the next or the previousstation or channels and stay there. This function isinactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display stops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for more than two seconds.This function is inactive, with some radios, ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press the seek uparrow to go to the next track or chapter on thedisc. Press the seek down arrow to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter (if morethan ten seconds have played). This function isinactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow toperform a cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow toperform a cursor right or left on the menu.

371

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

While a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD orDVD audio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listening tothe CD or DVD audio.

While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,press this button to select the next disc, ifmultiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the PROG button to perform the menufunction, Enter.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operateand LOCKED displays.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has audiosteering wheel controls,they could differdepending on thevehicle’s options. Someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthe steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

372

While a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous trackor chapter.

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, ifyour vehicle has these features, does not mute.Press and release this button again, to turnthe sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressand hold this button briefly to initiate voicerecognition. See “Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual for more information.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button briefly to interact with the OnStar®

system. If your vehicle also has the navigationsystem, press and hold this button briefly to initiatevoice recognition and say “OnStar” to enterOnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System onpage 185 in this manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped). Press this button to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,and external electronic devices are pluggedinto the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

373

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsonly reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels couldcause loss of the XM™ signal for a period oftime. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

374

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to its base. If tightening is required,tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

375

✍ NOTES

376

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ... 378Defensive Driving ...................................... 378Drunken Driving ........................................ 379Control of a Vehicle .................................. 382Braking ...................................................... 382Antilock Brake System (ABS) .................... 383Braking in Emergencies ............................. 385Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 385StabiliTrak® System ................................... 385Steering .................................................... 389Off-Road Recovery .................................... 391Passing ..................................................... 391Loss of Control .......................................... 393Off-Road Driving ........................................ 394Driving at Night ......................................... 411Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 412City Driving ............................................... 416Freeway Driving ........................................ 417

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 418Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 419Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 420Winter Driving ........................................... 422If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 426Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 426Recovery Hooks (Except SS Model) .......... 427Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 428Adding a Snow Plow or Similar

Equipment .............................................. 435Truck-Camper Loading Information ............ 439Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ............ 443

Towing ........................................................ 443Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 443Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 443Towing a Trailer ........................................ 449Trailer Recommendations .......................... 490

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

377

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 22.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

378

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S.state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

379

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to sixdrinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.

380

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are with agroup, designate a driver who will notdrink.

381

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 385.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 494.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 262.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight allplay a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

382

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 494.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Antilock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 263.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRPproblem, both the brake and ABS warning lightscome on accompanied by a 10-second chime. Thelights and chime will come on each time theignition is turned on until the problem is repaired.See your dealer/retailer for service.

383

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to makethe most of available tire and road conditions. Thiscan help you steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

384

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.You might feel the brakes vibrate or noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Locking Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your locking rearaxle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axlemost of the time, but when one of the rear wheelshas no traction and the other does, this featurewill allow the wheel with traction to move thevehicle.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have the StabiliTrak® systemwhich combines antilock brake, traction andstability control systems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of the vehicle in mostdriving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normal anddoes not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.The system should initialize before the vehiclereaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it maytake approximately two miles of driving before thesystem initializes.

385

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theStabiliTrak® light along with one of the followingmessages will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROLOFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. Ifthese DIC messages appear, make sure theStabiliTrak® system has not been turned off usingthe StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn thesteering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clockposition to the three o’clock position. If this clearsthe message(s), your vehicle does not needservicing. If this does not clear the message(s),then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and thenturn it back on again to reset the system. If anyof these messages still appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), your vehicle should betaken in for service. For more information onthe DIC messages, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 273.

The StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the system isboth on and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

The traction controldisable button is locatedon the instrument panelbelow the climatecontrols.

The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can beturned off by pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak® button if both systems (traction controland StabiliTrak®) were previously on. To disableboth traction control and StabiliTrak®, pressand hold the button for five seconds.

386

Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned onby pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button ifnot automatically shut off for any other reason.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off,the StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCSoff or StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed onthe DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will stillhave brake-traction control when traction control isoff, but will not be able to use the engine speedmanagement system. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for more information.

When the traction control system has been turnedoff, you may still hear system noises as a resultof the brake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426.

When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak®

light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC. Both tractioncontrol and StabiliTrak® are automatically disabledin this condition.

387

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle. It willactivate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash ifit senses that any of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while driving. If you turnoff traction control, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction control will work. Theengine speed management will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle tospin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABSand brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed, youcould damage the transfer case. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights and this messageare displayed.

The traction control system may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this happens,you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or mayhear a noise or vibration. This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 224.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailerfor service.

388

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to dotheir work where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 385.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want to goslower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while thefront wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 494.

389

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First, apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 382. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.

390

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

391

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your move

so you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check the blindspot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember that,if your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirroris convex, the vehicle you just passed mayseem to be farther away from you than itreally is.

392

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicletoo rapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the threecontrol systems — brakes, steering, andacceleration — do not have enough friction wherethe tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only theacceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 385. If the StabiliTrak® System is off,then an acceleration skid is also best handled byeasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

393

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that havefour-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 382.If your vehicle is an SS Model or does nothave four-wheel drive, you should not driveoff-road unless you are on a level, solid surface. Ifyour vehicle has 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies,do not use your vehicle for off-road driving.See Tires on page 558.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these is theterrain itself.“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked. There are no roadsigns. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill ordownhill. In short, you have gone right back tonature.

394

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And thatis why it is very important that you read this guide.You will find many driving tips and suggestions.These will help make your off-road driving safer andmore enjoyable.

If you think you will need some more groundclearance at the front of your vehicle, youcan remove the front fascia lower air dam.The front fascia lower air dam is held in place bytwo bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snapfeatures are accessible from underneath the frontfascia.

The following steps must be performed on thebolts and snap features to remove the air dam:

1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.

2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down onthe snap features and disengage the snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps aredisengaged, push forward on the air dam untilit is free.

When you are back on roads, though, be sure toreplace the air dam.

Notice: Operating your vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper air flow to theengine. Always be sure to replace the frontfascia air dam when you are finished off-roaddriving.

To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:

1. Line up the snap features and push theair dam rearward to engage the snaps.

2. Install the two outboard bolts.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached. Be sure you readall the information about your four-wheel-drivevehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is thespare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels upwhere they should be? What are the locallaws that apply to off-roading where you will bedriving? If you do not know, you should check withlaw enforcement people in the area. Will you beon someone’s private land? If so, be sure toget the necessary permission.

395

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of your rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428and Tires on page 558.

396

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey allposted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure allrefuse is removed from any campsitebefore leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires (wherepermitted), camp stoves and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials that couldcatch fire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain andplan your route. You are much less likely to getbad surprises. Get accurate maps of trailsand terrain. Try to learn of any blocked orclosed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least oneother vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure toread the winch instructions. In a remote area, awinch can be handy if you get stuck. But you willwant to know how to use it properly.

397

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that is safeand close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require some newand different driving skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, youwill need to respond to vibrations and vehiclebounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when you driveover obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This couldcause you to lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or off the road,you and your passengers should wearsafety belts.

398

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features. Hereare some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affectsthe steering, acceleration, and braking of yourvehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kindof surface you are on, you may experience slipping,sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poortraction, and longer braking distances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly upahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands if you are notprepared.

399

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground. If thishappens, even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe and whatis not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 379.

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

400

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb,descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.On a very small hill, for example, there may be asmooth, constant incline with only a small change inelevation where you can easily see all the way tothe top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeperas you near the top, but you may not see thisbecause the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as youapproach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know. It is the smartway to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocksbecause they are more susceptible to theeffects of erosion.

401

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during theday. They make your vehicle more visible tooncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

402

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down the hill inREVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restartthe engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),release the parking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way, you will be able to tellif your wheels are straight and maneuver asyou back down. It is best that you backdown the hill with your wheels straight ratherthan in the left or right direction. Turningthe wheel too far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shiftinginto NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engineand regain forward momentum. This will notwork. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stopthe vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steepenough to cause you to roll over if you turnaround. If you cannot make it up the hill, youmust back straight down the hill.

403

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it. Whatshould I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transmissionin PARK (P), and turn off the engine. Leavethe vehicle and go get some help. Exit on theuphill side and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do notshift the transfer case to NEUTRAL whenyou leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). This isbecause the NEUTRAL position on thetransfer case overrides the transmission.You or someone else could be injured. Ifyou are going to leave your vehicle, set theparking brake and shift the transmission toPARK (P). But do not shift the transfer caseto NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer case in theTwo-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel Low position.

404

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpyour brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

405

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll overif you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”Your brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill, here iswhat to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out andget help.

406

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Findanother route instead.

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the muchmore narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may not

prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem whenyou drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can cause your tiresto slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit something that will tripit — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

407

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill. Whatshould I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.

Stalling on an Incline

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

408

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, yourwheels will not get good traction. You cannotaccelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, andyou will need longer braking distances. If yourvehicle has four-wheel drive, see Four-Wheel Driveon page 154 for transfer case mode selection.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Inreally deep mud, the idea is to keep yourvehicle moving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This hasan effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction isso poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.And if you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause you to slide out ofcontrol.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

409

Driving in Water

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage your axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get your tailpipe under water. And,as long as your tailpipe is under water, youwill never be able to start your engine. When yougo through water, remember that when yourbrakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads onpage 412 for more information on driving throughwater.

410

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected onthe underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

411

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your tire-to-road traction isnot as good as on dry roads.

412

And, if your tires do not have much tread left, youwill get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement. If your vehicle has four-wheeldrive, see Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 fortransfer case mode selection.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, tryto slow down before you hit them.

413

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

414

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle. Ifthis happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 558.

415

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 417.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

416

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Tryto merge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust yourspeed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate ifit is slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

417

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion. Afterdriving for any distance at higher speeds, you maytend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out. Ofcourse, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

418

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less thana second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrorsand instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

419

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 394 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

420

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You might see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

421

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions,include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,or a couple of burlap bags to help providetraction. Be sure you properly secure these itemsin your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 558.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, andneed to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itcan offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

422

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

StabiliTrak® improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. But you can turnStabiliTrak® off if you ever need to. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 385 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 426. Even with StabiliTrak®, slow down andadjust your driving to the road conditions.Under certain conditions, you might want to turnStabiliTrak® off, such as when driving throughdeep snow and loose gravel, to help maintainvehicle motion at lower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) onpage 383.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchescan appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of iceahead of you, brake before you are on it. Trynot to brake while you are actually on theice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

423

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

424

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

425

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youneed to spin the wheels, but you do not wantto spin the wheels too fast. The method known asrocking can help you get out when you arestuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting thetransmission back and forth, you can destroythe transmission.For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 584.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around the front wheels. If you havea four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into Four-WheelHigh. If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, you shouldturn the system off. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 385. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. Release the acceleratorpedal while you shift, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward andreverse directions, you will cause a rocking motionthat may free your vehicle. If that does not get yourvehicle out after a few tries, it may need to be towedout. You can use the recovery hooks, if your vehiclehas them. If your vehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 443.

426

Recovery Hooks (Except SS Model)

Notice: SS Models have recovery hooksthat are concealed by the front bumper trimcovering. Use of the recovery hooks couldcause damage to your vehicle. If you have theSS Model, do not use the recovery hooks.

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straightout. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back. Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front ofthe vehicle, you can use them if you are stuckoff-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

427

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it was designed to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver’s door open, you will find the labelattached below the door lock post (striker). Thetire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

Label Example

428

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 558 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle. See Towinga Trailer on page 449 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

429

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

430




1000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is foundon the rear edge of the driver’s door. Thelabel shows the size of your vehicle’s original tiresand the inflation pressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Example 3

431

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label also contains importantinformation about your Front Axle ReserveCapacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity,and how do I calculate it?” under Adding aSnow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 435.

{CAUTION:

In the case of a sudden stop or collision,things carried in the bed of your truckcould shift forward and come into thepassenger area, injuring you and others. Ifyou put things in the bed of your truck,you should make sure they are properlysecured.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you loadyour vehicle the right way.

432

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If youhave to stop or turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.



• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving“ under Off-RoadDriving on page 394.

433

Two-Tiered LoadingDepending on the model of your pick-up, you cancreate an upper load platform by positioningtwo or four 2 inches (5 cm) by 6 inches (15 cm)wooden planks across the width of the pickup box.The planks must be inserted in the pickup boxdepressions. The length of the planks must allowfor at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surfaceon each end of the plank.

When using this upper load platform, be sure theload is securely tied down to prevent it fromshifting. The load’s center of gravity should bepositioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zoneis located in the area between the front of eachwheel well and the rear of each wheel well.The center of gravity height must not extend abovethe top of the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’staillamp area must be properly marked accordingto local laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may needto put a limit on how many people you carryinside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

* Equipment Maximum WeightLadder Rack and Cargo 750 lbs (340 kg)Cross Toolbox and Cargo 400 lbs (181 kg)Side Boxes and Cargo 250 lbs per side

(113 kg per side)* The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipmentshould not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg).

434

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentBefore installing a snow plow on your vehicle,here are some things you will need to know:

Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snowplow prep package, adding a plow candamage your vehicle, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by warranty. Unless yourvehicle was built to carry a snow plow, do notadd one to your vehicle. If your vehicle hasthe snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU,then the payload your vehicle can carry willbe reduced when a snow plow is installed.Your vehicle can be damaged if either the frontor rear axle ratings or the Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) are exceeded.

Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle asnow plow?

A: Some vehicles are built with a special snowplow prep package, called RPO VYU. If yourvehicle has this option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such as the weightson the vehicle’s axles and the Gross VehicleWeight (GVW), are not exceeded.

Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?

A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends onmany things, such as:

• The options your vehicle came with, and theweight of those options.

• The weight and number of passengers youintend to carry.

• The weight of items you have added to yourvehicle, like a tool box or truck cap.

• The total weight of any additional cargo youintend to carry.

435

Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg)snow plow. The total weight of all occupants andcargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb(135 kg). This means that you may only be able tocarry one passenger. But, even this may be toomuch if you have got other equipment alreadyadding to the weight of your vehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safely carrying asnow plow on your vehicle:

• Make sure the weight on the front andrear axles does not exceed the axle ratingfor each.

• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengersmust be carried, appropriate counter ballastmust be installed rear of the rear axle. Counterballast must be properly secured so it willnot move during driving.

• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’srecommendations regarding rear ballast. Rearballast may be required to ensure a properfront and rear weight distribution ratio,even though the actual weight at the front axlemay be less than the front axle rating.

• The snow plow manufacturer or installer canassist you in determining the amount of rearballast required, to help make sure yoursnowplow/vehicle combination does notexceed the GVW rating, the front and rearaxle ratings, and the front and rear weightdistribution ratio.

• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVWrating.

Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, andhow do I calculate it?

A: Front axle reserve capacity is the differencebetween your front Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) and the front axle weight of yourvehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically,it is the amount of weight you can add toyour front axle before reaching yourfront GAWR.

436

The front axle reserve capacity for your vehiclecan be found in the lower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.

In order to calculate the amount of weight anyfront accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding tothe front axle, use the following formula:

(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory isadding to the front axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessory is in front of thefront axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase


437

For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plowactually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if the snow plowis 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and thewheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then:W = 700 lb (318 kg)A = 4 ft (122 cm)W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)

(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =980 lbs (445 kg)

So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity ismore than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could addthe snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR.

Q: What if I want to add heavier equipmentto my vehicle?

A: You can add heavier equipment on the frontof the vehicle if you compensate for it bycarrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or bypositioning cargo towards the rear. Thishas the effect of reducing the load on the front.However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, andthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)must never be exceeded.

{CAUTION:

On some vehicles that have certain frontmounted equipment, such as a snowplow, it may be possible to load the frontaxle to the front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enough weight onthe rear axle to have proper brakingperformance. If your brakes can not workproperly, you could have a crash. To helpyour brakes work properly when a snowplow is installed, always follow the snowplow manufacturer or installer’srecommendation for rear ballast to ensurea proper front and rear weight distributionratio, even though the actual front weightmay be less than the front GAWR, and thetotal vehicle weight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR). Maintaininga proper front and rear weight distributionratio is necessary to provide properbraking performance.

438

Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?

A: This is the difference between your GVWR andthe weight of your truck with full fuel andpassengers. It is the amount of weight you canadd to your vehicle before reaching yourGVWR. Keep in mind that reserve capacitynumbers are intended as a guide whenselecting the amount of equipment or cargoyour truck can carry. If you are unsure of yourvehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to aweigh station and weigh your vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer can also help you with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacity for yourvehicle can be found in the lower right cornerof the Certification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer/retailer for additional advice andinformation about using a snow plow on yourvehicle. Also, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 428.

Emergency Roof Lamp ProvisionsVehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow preppackage also have an emergency roof lampprovision package, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is provided above theoverhead console. See Auxiliary Roof MountedLamp on page 231 for switch location.

Truck-Camper Loading Information

Notice: Installing a truck-camper to avehicle that is equipped with the SS trimpackage could damage the vehicle. Do notinstall a truck-camper on a vehicle equippedwith the SS trim package.

A vehicle specific Truck-Camper Loadinginformation label is attached to the inside of yourvehicle’s glove box. This label will tell you ifyour vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, howmuch of a load your vehicle can carry, and how tocorrectly spread out the load. Also, it will helpyou match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle.

439

When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargoload of your vehicle is the weight of the camper,plus the following:

• Everything else added to the camper after itleft the factory

• Everything in the camper

• All the people inside

The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximumweight of the load your vehicle can carry. Itdoes not include the weight of the people inside.But, you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not be more than yourvehicle’s CWR.

Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Informationlabel in the glove box for dimensions A and B asshown in the following illustration.

Use the rear edge of the load floor formeasurement purposes. The recommendedlocation for the cargo center of gravity is atpoint C for the CWR. It is the point where themass of a body is concentrated and, if suspendedat that point, would balance the front and rear.

440

Here is an example of proper truck and campermatch:

A. Camper Center of GravityB. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,the total cargo load of the truck consists of themanufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight ofinstalled additional camper equipment not includedin the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, theweight of camper cargo, and the weight ofpassengers in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’scargo weight rating and the camper’s center ofgravity (A) should fall within the truck’srecommended center of gravity zone (B) wheninstalled.

You must weigh any accessories or otherequipment that you add to your vehicle. Then,subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extraweight may shorten the center of gravity zone ofyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.

If your slide-in camper and its load weighsless than the CWR, the center of gravity zone foryour vehicle may be larger.

Your dealer can help you make a goodvehicle-camper match and help you determinethe CWR.

441

After you have loaded your vehicle and camper,drive to a weigh station and weigh the frontand rear wheels separately. This will tell you theloads on the axles. The loads on the front and rearaxles should not be more than either of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total ofthe axle loads should not be more than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Open the driver’s door and look at theCertification/Tire label to find out your vehicle’sGAWRs and GVWR.

If your vehicle has gone over the weight ratings,move or take out some things until all theweight falls below the ratings.

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts thatcould affect the balance of your vehicle. When thetruck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale andweigh on the front and on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axle loads. Individual axleloads should not exceed either of the grossaxle weight ratings (GAWR).

The total of the axle loads should not exceed yourvehicle’s gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).These ratings are given on the vehicle certificationlabel attached to the rear edge of the driver’sdoor. See “Certification/Tire Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 428. If weight ratings areexceeded, move or remove items to bring allweights below the ratings.

When you install and load your slide-in camper,check the manufacturer’s instructions.

If you want more information on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and thecorrect center of gravity zone for your vehicle, yourdealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of“Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.”

442

Pickup Conversion to Chassis CabWe are aware that some vehicle owners mightconsider having the pickup box removed anda commercial or recreational body installed.Owners should be aware that, as manufactured,there are differences between a chassis cab and apickup with the box removed which could affectvehicle safety. The components necessaryto adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with aspecialized body should be installed by the bodybuilder.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 658.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as dinghytowing, towing your vehicle will all four wheelson the ground, and dolly towing, towing yourvehicle with two wheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.

443

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 418.

Dinghy TowingTwo-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while being towed.

444

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You orothers could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 154 for theproper procedure to select the neutral positionfor your vehicle.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe towing vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition off and leave the steeringcolumn unlocked.

445

Dolly TowingFront Towing (Front Wheels Off theGround)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Nevertow your vehicle with the rear wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towedwith the rear wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while being towed.

To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, you musttow the vehicle with the rear wheels on thedolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)” later in this section for more information.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.

2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow dolly.

446

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You orothers could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL.

6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 154 for theproper procedure to select the neutral positionfor your vehicle.

7. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe towing vehicle.

8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steeringcolumn.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)Two-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 169.

3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straightbefore towing.Use an adequate clamping device to ensurethat the front wheels are locked into thestraight position.

5. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe tow vehicle.


447

Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 169.

3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle.Use an adequate clamping device to ensurethat the front wheels are locked into thestraight position.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You orothers could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 154.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe tow vehicle.


448

Towing a TrailerIf your vehicle has a diesel engine, see theDURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See NewVehicle Break-In on page 139 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. To pull atrailer correctly, follow the advice in thispart, and see your dealer for importantinformation about towing a trailer with yourvehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

449

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to THIRD (3), orFOURTH (4) with the Allison or Hydra-matic6-speed transmissions, or if necessary, a lowergear selection if the transmission shifts too

often, such as under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions. See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 272.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The weight on your vehicle’s tires

Tow/Haul Mode

Press this button at theend of the shift lever toenable/disable thetow/haul mode.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load. SeeTow/Haul Mode on page 152 for more information.

450

Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective whenthe vehicle and trailer combined weight is atleast 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of theTrailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul is mostuseful under the following driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load through rolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in stop and go traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in busy parking lots whereimproved low speed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

451

Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehiclemodel and options.

C-1500 Regular CabStandard Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.3L V6 3.233.73

4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)5,300 lbs (2 404 kg)

9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.233.73

5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)

5.3L V8 3.423.73

7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)maximum.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

C-1500 Extended CabStandard Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR+

4.3L V6 3.233.73

4,300 lbs (1 950 kg)4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)

9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.233.73

4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)

5.3L V8 3.423.73

6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

452

C-1500 Extended CabStandard Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR+

6.0L V8 3.73 8,800 lbs (3 992 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)6.0L V8** 3.73 10,300 lbs (4 717 kg) 15,500 lbs (7 031 kg)*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)maximum.*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) except with 6000 V8 engine limited to6,900 lbs (3 130 kg).**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

C-1500 Extended CabShort Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.3L V6 3.233.73

4,400 lbs (1 196 kg)4,900 lbs (2 223 kg)

9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.233.73

4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,000 lbs (5 448 kg)

5.3L V8 3.423.73

6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 448 kg)13,000 lbs (5 902 kg)

6.0L V8 3.73 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

453

C-1500 Crew Cab ShortBox (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR+

4.8L V8 3.233.73

4,600 lbs (2 086 kg)6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)

5.3L V8 3.423.73

6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

6.0L V8 3.73 8,700 lbs (3 946 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)6.0L V8** 3.73 10,200 lbs (4 627 kg) 15,500 lbs (7 031 kg)*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

C-1500 Regular CabLong Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.3L V6 3.233.73

4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)

9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.233.73

5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,000 lbs (5 448 kg)

5.3L V8 3.423.73

7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)maximum.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

454

C-1500 Extended CabLong Box (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

5.3L V8 3.423.73

6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)maximum.*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 7,600 lbs (3 447 kg).**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

K-1500 Regular CabStandard Box (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.3L V6 3.73 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.424.10

5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)

11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)13,000 lbs (5 902 kg)

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)


455

K-1500 Extended CabStandard Box (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR+

4.8L V8 3.424.10

5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

6.0L V8 3.73 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)6.0L V8** 4.10 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg) 16,000 lbs (6 257 kg)*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)maximum.*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) except with 6000 V8 engine which hassufficient payload for any fifth wheel/gooseneck trailering.**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

K-1500 Extended CabShort Box (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.8L V8 3.424.10

5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

6.0L V8 3.73 8,600 lbs (3 9015 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

456

K-1500 Crew Cab ShortBox (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR+

4.8L V8 3.424.10

5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)7,400 lbs (3 356 kg)

11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

6.0L V8 3.73 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)6.0L V8** 4.10 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg) 16,000 lbs (6 257 kg)6.2L V8 3.42 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

K-1500 Regular CabLong Box (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4.3L V6 3.73 4,800 lbs (2 177 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

4.8L V8 3.424.10

5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)

11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)


457

K-1500 Extended CabLong Box (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

5.3L V8 3.734.10

7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)

13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

*This vehicle has insufficient payload for fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailering.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

C-2500 ExtendedCab StandardBox HD (2WD)*

Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin tongue weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum.*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

458

C-2500 CrewCab StandardBox HD (2WD)*


6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs(1 361 kg) maximum.*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

C-2500 Regular CabLong Box HD (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)12,900 lbs (5 851 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)

*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin tongue weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum.*Trailer ratings above 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) require a fifth-wheel or gooseneck hitch.**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

459

C-2500 Extended CabLong Box HD (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


C-2500 Crew Cab LongBox HD (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


460

K-2500 ExtendedCab StandardBox HD (4WD)*


6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


K-2500 CrewCab StandardBox HD (4WD)*


6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


461

K-2500 Regular CabLong Box HD (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


K-2500 Extended CabLong Box HD (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


462

K-2500 Crew Cab LongBox HD (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,600 lbs (4 354 kg)12,100 lbs (5 488 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


C-3500 RegularCab (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)12,600 lbs (5 715 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


463

C-3500 ExtendedCab (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)

6.0L V8 (Dual RearWheels)

3.734.10

9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


C-3500 CrewCab (2WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,600 lbs (4 354 kg)12,100 lbs (5 488 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


3.734.10

9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


464

K-3500 RegularCab (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


3.734.10

9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


K-3500 ExtendedCab (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


3.734.10

9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)11,700 lbs (5 307 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


465

K-3500 CrewCab (4WD)* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

6.0L V8 3.734.10

9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


3.734.10

9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)

16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)


Ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or write us at our Customer AssistanceOffices. See Customer Assistance Offices onpage 656 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue

weight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 428 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

466

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up toa maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) for the 1500 or2500 series, and up to a maximum of 750 lbs(340 kg) for the 2500 HD or 3500 series with aweight carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A)should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight, up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs(453 kg) for the 1500 series and up to a maximumof 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the 2500, 2500 HD or3500 series with a weight distributing hitch.

Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to themaximum amount specified in the trailering chartfor your vehicle. See “Weight of the Trailer”,and “Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering” in thissection.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

467

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. Ithas a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWRof 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater thanjust the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg).

This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWRas well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs(3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You maygo further and think you must limit tongue weightto less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoidexceeding GVWR.

468

But, you must still consider the effect on the rearaxle. Because your rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percentof total loaded trailer weight, you can expectthat the largest trailer your vehicle can properlyhandle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle for moreinformation. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue. If you use aweight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t goover the rear axle limit before you apply the weightdistribution spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch.

469

Weight-Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

A: Body to Ground Distance

B: Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitchmust be adjusted so the distance (A) remainsthe same both before and after coupling the trailerto the tow vehicle.

If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper couldbe damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there isample room when turning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sureto use a properly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the proper size.This equipment is very important for proper vehicleloading and good handling when driving. Alwaysuse a sway control if the trailer will weighmore than these limits. You can ask a hitch dealerabout sway controls.

Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck TraileringFifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can beused with many pickup models. These trailersplace a larger percentage of the weight (kingpinweight) on the tow vehicle than conventionaltrailers. Make sure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.

Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to themaximum amount specified in the trailering chartfor your vehicle. See “Weight of the Trailer” inthis section for more information.

470

The hitch should be located in the pickup bed sothat it’s centerline is over or slightly in front of therear axle. Take care that it is not so far forward thatit will contact the back of the cab in sharp turns.This is especially important for short box pickups.Trailer pin box extensions and sliding fifth wheelhitch assemblies can help this condition. Thereshould be at least six inches of clearance betweenthe top of the pickup box and the bottom of thetrailer shelf that extends over the box.

Make sure the hitch is attached to the tow vehicleframe rails. Do not use the pickup box forsupport.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg)with a factory-installed step bumper, you mayattach the safety chains to the attaching points onthe bumper. If you are towing a trailer up toyour vehicle’s trailer rating limit you may attachthe safety chains to the attaching point on the hitchplatform. If you are towing with an aftermarkethitch follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and theymust be adequate. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,your trailer cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system.

471

Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from yourvehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,both braking systems won’t work well. Youcould even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, make the braketap at the port on the master cylinder thatsends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t usecopper tubing for this. If you do, it will bendand finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

Integrated Trailer Brake Control System

Your vehicle may havean Integrated TrailerBrake Control (ITBC)system for electric trailerbrakes.

This symbol is located on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on the amount ofbrake pressure being applied by your vehicle’sbrake system. This available power output to thetrailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide rangeof trailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated with your vehicle’sbrake, anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak® (if equipped)systems. In trailering conditions that cause yourvehicle’s anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak® systems toactivate, power sent to the trailer’s brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheellock-up. This does not imply that your trailer has theStabiliTrak® system.

If your vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake orStabiliTrak® systems are not functioning properly,your ITBC system may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sure all of thesesystems are fully operational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

472

The ITBC system is powered through yourvehicle’s electrical system. Turning the ignition offwill also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBCsystem is fully functional only when the ignition isin ON or in RUN.

The ITBC system can only be used with trailerswith electric brakes.

{CAUTION:

Connecting a trailer that is not compatiblewith the ITBC system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be an increase instopping distance or trailer instabilitywhich could result in personal injury ordamage to your vehicle, trailer, or otherproperty. An aftermarket controller may beavailable for use with trailers with surge,air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake



systems. To determine the type of brakeson your trailer and the availability ofcontrollers, check with your trailermanufacturer or dealer.

When trailering, make sure of the following:

• The ITBC system is used only with trailers thatare equipped with electric brakes.

• All applicable local and federal laws andregulations are followed.

• All electrical and mechanical connections tothe trailer are made correctly.

• The trailer’s brakes are in proper workingcondition.

• The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded forthe towing condition.

The ITBC system is a factory installed item.Out-of-factory installation of this system should notbe attempted. GM is not responsible for warrantyor performance of the system resulting fromout-of-factory installation.

473

Trailer Brake Control Panel

A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply LeverB. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

The ITBC system has a control panel located onthe instrument panel to the left of the steeringcolumn. See Instrument Panel Overview(Base/Uplevel version) on page 212 or InstrumentPanel Overview (Premium version) on page 215for more information on location. The control panelallows you to adjust the amount of output,referred to as trailer gain, available to the electrictrailer brakes and allows you to manually applythe trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panelis used along with the Trailer Brake DisplayPage on the DIC to adjust and display poweroutput to the trailer brakes.

474

Trailer Brake DIC Display PageThe ITBC system displays messages into thevehicle’s Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 285 for moreinformation.The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting,power output to the electric trailer brakes, trailerconnection and system operational status.

A. Trailer Gain SettingB. Power Output to Trailer BrakesC. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault

present

The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayedby performing any of the following actions:

• Scrolling through the DIC menu pages usingthe odometer trip stem or the DIC VehicleInformation button (if equipped).

• Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the TrailerBrake Display Page is not currently displayed,pressing a Trailer Gain button will firstrecall the current Trailer Gain setting. After theTrailer Brake Display Page is displayed,subsequent depressions of the gain buttonswill then cause the Trailer Gain setting tochange.

• Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Applylever

• Connecting a trailer equipped with electrictrailer brakes

All DIC warning and service messages must firstbe acknowledged by the driver before theTrailer Brake Display Page can be displayed andTrailer Gain can be adjusted.

475

TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayedanytime the Trailer Brake Display Page is active.This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0with either a trailer connected or disconnected. Toadjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the TrailerGain adjustment buttons located on the TrailerBrake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain buttonto cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust theTrailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).

0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. Toproperly adjust trailer gain, see the TrailerGain Adjustment Procedure later in this section.

TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time atrailer with electric brakes is connected. Output tothe electric brakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relative to the TrailerGain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 10 barsfor each gain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on theTrailer Brake Display Page whenever the followingoccur:

• No trailer is connected.

• A trailer without electric brakes is connected(no DIC message is displayed).

• A trailer with electric brakes has becomedisconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also be displayed on the DIC).

• There is a fault present in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILERWIRING message will also be displayed onthe DIC).

• There is a fault in the ITBC system (aSERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage will also be displayed in the DIC).

476

Manual Trailer Brake ApplyThe Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located onthe Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to applythe trailer’s electric brakes independent of yourvehicle’s brakes. This lever is used in the TrailerGain Adjustment Procedure to properly adjust thepower output to the trailer brakes. Sliding the leverto the left will apply only the trailer brakes. Thepower output to the trailer is indicated in the TrailerBrake Display Page in the DIC. If your vehicle’sservice brakes are applied while using the ManualTrailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output powerwill be the greater of the two.

The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will comeon when either vehicle braking or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment ProcedureTrailer Gain should be set for a specific traileringcondition and must be adjusted any timevehicle loading, trailer loading or road surfaceconditions change.

Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for thebest trailer stopping performance. A trailer thatis over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes.A trailer that is under-gained may result in notenough trailer braking. Both of these conditionsmay result in poorer stopping and stability ofthe vehicle and trailer.

Use the following procedure to correctly adjustTrailer Gain for each towing condition:

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in properworking condition.

2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to thevehicle and make all necessary mechanicaland electrical connections. See Loading YourVehicle on page 428 for more information.

477

3. After the electrical connection is made to atrailer equipped with electric brakes:

• A TRAILER CONNECTED message will bebriefly displayed on the DIC display.

• The Trailer Brake Display Page will appearon the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN andTRAILER OUTPUT.

• In the Trailer Output display on theDIC, “- - - - - -“ will disappear if there is noerror present. Connecting a trailer withoutelectric brakes will not clear the six dashedlines.

4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gainadjustment (+ / -) buttons on the TrailerBrake Control Panel.

5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on alevel road surface representative of the towingcondition and free of traffic at about 20 to25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever.

Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the pointof trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailerwheel squeal or puffs of tire smoke whena trailer wheel locks.Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towinga heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjustthe Trailer Gain to the highest allowablesetting for the towing condition.

7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicleloading, trailer loading or road surfaceconditions change or if you notice trailer wheellock-up at any time while you are towing

478

Other ITBC Related DIC MessagesIn addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN andTRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC, trailerconnection and ITBC system status is displayed inthe DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will bebriefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakesis first connected to the vehicle. This messagewill automatically turn off in about ten seconds.The driver can also acknowledge this messagebefore it automatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will bedisplayed if:

1. The ITBC system first determines connectionto a trailer with electric brakes and then thetrailer harness becomes disconnectedfrom the vehicle.If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle isstationary, this message will automatically turnoff in about thirty seconds. This messagewill also turn off if the driver acknowledges thismessage off or if the trailer harness isre-connected.If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle ismoving, this message will continue until theignition is turned off. This message will alsoturn off if the driver acknowledges this messageoff or if the trailer harness is re-connected.

2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to theelectric trailer brakes. This message willcontinue as long as there is an electrical fault inthe trailer wiring. This message will also turn offif the driver acknowledges this message off.

479

To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicleside or trailer side of the trailer wiring harnessconnection, do the following:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from thevehicle.

2. Turn the ignition OFF.

3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition backto RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING messagere-appears, the electrical fault is on thevehicle side.If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING messageonly re-appears when you connect the trailerwiring harness to the vehicle, the electricalfault is on the trailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – Thismessage will be displayed when there is a problemwith the ITBC system. If this message persistsover multiple ignition cycles there is problem withthe ITBC system. Take your vehicle to anauthorized GM dealer to have the ITBC systemdiagnosed and repaired.

If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING orSERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message isdisplayed while you are driving your vehicle,you no longer have power available to your trailerbrakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefullypull your vehicle over to the side of the road andturn the ignition off. Check the wiring connectionto the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If eitherof these messages continues, either yourvehicle or your trailer needs service.

An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnoseand repair problems with your trailer. However,any diagnosis and repair of your trailer is notcovered under your GM Warranty. Please contactyour trailer dealer for assistance with trailerrepairs and trailer warranty information.

480

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness or death. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 173. To maximizeyour safety when towing a trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.



• If exhaust does come into your vehiclethrough a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Climate Control System(With Air Conditioning ) on page 240or Climate Control System (HeaterOnly) on page 243.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

481

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

While towing a trailer or when exposed to longperiods of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed maybecome very warm. Avoid putting items in thetruck bed that might be affected by high ambienttemperatures.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up aheadwhen you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just movethat hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turns whiletrailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

482

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions).

You may also want to activate the tow/haul modeif the transmission shifts too often. See Tow/HaulMode Light on page 272.

When towing at high elevation on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant athigher elevations will boil at a lower temperaturethan at or near sea level. If you turn yourengine off immediately after towing at highelevation on steep uphill grades, your vehicle mayshow signs similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with the transmissionin PARK (P) at least five minutes before turning theengine off. If you do get the overheat warning,see Engine Overheating on page 523.

483

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorb theload.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear and not inNEUTRAL.

6. Release the regular brakes.

484

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that follow.

Always put the shift lever fully inPARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If the transfer case on four-wheel-drivevehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if your shift lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start your engine

• Shift into a gear

• Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

485

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633 formore information. Things that are especiallyimportant in trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axlelubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, andthe Index will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review thesesections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle is equipped with one of the followingwiring harnesses for towing a trailer or haulinga slide-in camper.

Basic Trailer WiringAll regular, extended cab and crew cab pickupshave a seven-wire trailer towing harness.

For vehicles not equipped with heavy dutytrailering, the harness is clipped to the vehicle’sframe behind the spare tire mount. The harnessrequires the installation of a trailer connector,which is available through your dealer.

If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with astandard four-way round pin connector, you canalso get an adapter from your dealer.

486

Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring HarnessPackage

For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering,the harness is connected to a bracket on the hitchplatform. The seven-wire harness contains thefollowing trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red: Battery Feed*

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed inthe underhood electrical center, but the wiresare not connected. They should be connected byyour dealer or a qualified service center. Thefuse and wire for the ITBC is factory installed andconnected if the vehicle is equipped with anITBC. The fuse for the battery feed is not requiredif your vehicle has an auxiliary battery. If yourvehicle does not have an auxiliary battery, haveyour dealer or authorized service center install therequired fuse.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,press the tow/haul mode button located at theend of the shift lever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery. Ifthe trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, youcan turn on the headlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system and charge the battery.

487

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring PackageThe seven-wire camper harness is locatedunder the front edge of the pickup box on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, attached to the framebracket. A connector will have to be added tothe wiring harness which connects to the camper.

The harness contains the following camper/trailercircuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If your vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-DutyTrailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Package” earlier in this section.

When the camper-wiring harness is orderedwithout the heavy-duty trailering package, aneight-wire harness with a seven-pin connector islocated at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to thevehicle’s frame.

488

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisionsThese wiring provisions are included with yourvehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brake controller.The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires nearthe data link connector for the trailer brakecontroller. The harness contains the followingwires:

• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector

• Red/Black: Battery

• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch

• White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealer or a qualifiedservice center.

If your vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the bluntcuts exist, but are not connected further in theharness. If you install an aftermarket trailer brakecontroller, the ITBC must be disconnected. Donot power both ITBC and aftermarket controllers tocontrol the trailer brakes at the same time.

Auxiliary BatteryThe auxiliary battery provision can be used tosupply electrical power to additional equipment thatyou may choose to add, such as a slide-incamper. If your vehicle has this provision, thisrelay will be located on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle, next to the underhood electrical center.

489

Be sure to follow the proper installation instructionsthat are included with any electrical equipmentthat you install.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not use equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating for the auxiliarybattery provision.

Power WinchesIf you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle,only use it when your vehicle is stationary oranchored.

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch loads from the CWRfor your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with thetrailer attached, so that you won’t go overthe GVWR or GAWR. If you are using aweight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle withoutthe spring bars in place.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread outthe weight of your load the right way, and ifyou choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Traileron page 449.

490

Service ........................................................ 494Accessories and Modifications ................... 494California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 495Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 495Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 496Fuel ............................................................. 496

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 497Gasoline Specifications .............................. 497California Fuel ........................................... 497Additives ................................................... 498Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 499Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 500Filling the Tank ......................................... 500Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 503

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 504Hood Release ........................................... 504Engine Compartment Overview .................. 506Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) .................... 508

Engine Oil Life System .............................. 511Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

(Gasoline Engines) ................................. 513Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 516Engine Coolant .......................................... 520Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 523Engine Overheating ................................... 523Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode (V8 Engines Only) ........................ 526Cooling System ......................................... 527Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 532Power Steering Fluid ................................. 532Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 533Brakes ...................................................... 535Battery ...................................................... 539Jump Starting ............................................ 540

Rear Axle .................................................... 546Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 548Front Axle ................................................... 550

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

491

Noise Control System ................................. 551Tampering with Noise Control System

Prohibited .............................................. 551Bulb Replacement ....................................... 552

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 552Headlamps ................................................ 552Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp .................... 553Pickup Box Identification and Fender

Marker Lamps ........................................ 554Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 555License Plate Lamp ................................... 556Replacement Bulbs ................................... 557

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 557Tires ............................................................ 558

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 560Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 564

Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 567Dual Tire Operation ................................... 568Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 569Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 574When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 577Buying New Tires ...................................... 578Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 580Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 581Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 582Wheel Replacement .................................. 582Tire Chains ............................................... 584If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 585Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 586Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 588Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 592Secondary Latch System ........................... 598Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 602Spare Tire ................................................. 606


492

Appearance Care ........................................ 607Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 607Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 608Leather ...................................................... 609Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 610Care of Safety Belts .................................. 610Weatherstrips ............................................ 610Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 611Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 611Finish Care ............................................... 611Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 612Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ................................................ 613Tires ......................................................... 614Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 614Finish Damage .......................................... 614

Underbody Maintenance ............................ 614Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 615Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 615

Vehicle Identification .................................. 616Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 616Service Parts Identification Label ............... 617

Electrical System ........................................ 617Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 617Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 617Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 617Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 618Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 618Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 620Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 621

Capacities and Specifications .................... 626


493

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories couldeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When yougo to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

494

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 669.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 110.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 648.

495

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelIf your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “DieselFuel Requirements and Fuel System” in theDURAMAX® Diesel Supplement.

For vehicles with gasoline engines, pleaseread this.

GasolineUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 616.

If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), youcan use either regular unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 499.In all other gasoline engines, use only regularunleaded gasoline.

496

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 498 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 266. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

497

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

498

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 616.If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0)or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you can useeither regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuelon page 496. In all other engines, use only theunleaded gasoline described under GasolineOctane on page 497.Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VINCode 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3) canuse 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the useof E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. Theethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it ismade from renewable sources such as corn andother crops.Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanolfuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuels website(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those

stations that do have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798. By definition, this meansthat fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol contentbetween 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tankwith fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveability and couldcause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85fuel must be formulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specification D 5798. If youhave trouble starting on E85, it could be becausethe E85 fuel is not properly formulated for yourclimate. If this happens, switching to gasoline oradding gasoline to the fuel tank can improvestarting. For good starting and heater efficiencybelow 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is bestnot to alternate repeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended thatyou add as much fuel as possible — do not addless than three gallons (11 L) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicleto adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.

499

E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, soyou will need to refill the fuel tank more oftenwhen using E85 than when you are using gasoline.See Filling the Tank on page 500.

Notice: Some additives are not compatiblewith E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuelsystem. Do not add anything to E85. Damagecaused by additives would not be coveredby your new vehicle warranty.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the TankIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

500

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Ifthe vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow capwith the words “E85 / Gasoline” can be seen.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cabmodel, and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fueltank first to ensure a quick restart.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 611.

501

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. It will require more effort to turn thefuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 266.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) ifthe fuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 285 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 266.

502

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

503

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan can starteven when the engine is not running.To avoid injury, always keep hands,clothing, and tools away from any enginecooling fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it. Itis located insidethe vehicle to the leftof the brakepedal.

504

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locatethe secondary hood release. This is locatedunder the hood, near the center of the grille.

3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.

4. Lift the hood.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then bring the hood fromfull open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from theclosed position, pause, then push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.

505

Engine Compartment OverviewIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L and 6.0L similar), this is what you will see:

506

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 513.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (GasolineEngines) on page 513.

C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 527 and CoolantSurge Tank Pressure Cap on page 523.

D. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting onpage 540.

E. Battery. See Battery on page 539.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) onpage 508.

G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 516.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).See Jump Starting on page 540.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil(Gasoline Engine) on page 508.

J. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System onpage 527.

K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 532.

L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 535.

M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 621.

N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 533.

507

Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “EngineOil” in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light appears on theinstrument cluster, except vehicles that have the4.3L engine, check the engine oil level right away.

For more information, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 273. You should check theengine oil level regularly; this is an addedreminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 506for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

508

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 626.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

509

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

510

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 285. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, the engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system. Itis also important to check the oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

511

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message coming on, reset the system.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after everyoil change. It will not reset itself. To reset theEngine Oil Life System:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on theDIC. If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, the vehicle must be in PARK (P) toaccess this display. See DIC Operationand Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 274or DIC Operation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 281.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on theDIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if yourvehicle does not have DIC buttons, formore than five seconds. The oil life will changeto 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theEngine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could evencause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on yourskin for very long. Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly dispose of clothing or rags containingused engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

512

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (GasolineEngines)If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “PickupModels” under “Engine Air Cleaner/Filter” inthe DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the correctinspection and replacement procedures.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 for thelocation of the engine aircleaner/filter and theair filter restrictionindicator, if the vehiclehas one.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterIf your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filterneeds to be replaced. On vehicles with a restrictionindicator, you should inspect the air filterrestriction indicator at every oil change andreplace the engine air cleaner/filter when theindicator tells you to.

On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) onpage 633 for more information. If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

513

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterVehicles With an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorLocate the air filter restriction indicator on theengine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicatorturns black or is in the red/orange “change”zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator. SeeSteps 1 through 7 to replace the engine aircleaner/filter and to reset the air filter restrictionindicator.

Vehicles Without an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engineair cleaner/filter from the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 7. When you have the engine aircleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filterand Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator

1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 506.

2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of thehousing and lift up the cover.

514

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from thehousing. Care should be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealingsurfaces and the housing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, ifthe vehicle has one, by pressing the top buttonon the indicator.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

515

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is usually not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level. The only reason for fluidloss is a transmission leak or overheating thetransmission. If you suspect a small leak, then usethe following checking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then itmay be necessary to have the vehicle towed toa dealer/retailer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehicle further.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 644.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inthe Maintenance Schedule. See ScheduledMaintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633. Besure to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluid

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level, prepare yourvehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on alevel surface. Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

516

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, move the shift lever back to PARK (P).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for atleast one minute. Slowly release the brakepedal.

5. Keep the engine running and press theTrip/Fuel button or trip odometer resetstem until TRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determineand perform the appropriate check procedure.If the TRANS TEMP reading is not withinthe required temperature ranges, allowthe vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle untilthe appropriate transmission fluid temperatureis reached.

Cold Check ProcedureUse this procedure only as a reference todetermine if the transmission has enough fluid tobe operated safely until a hot check procedurecan be made. The hot check procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluid level. Performthe hot check procedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure to check fluid levelwhen the transmission temperature is between80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear ofthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

The dipstick handle hasthis graphic. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

517

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all theway, wait three seconds, and then pull it backout again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. Repeat the check procedure toverify the reading.

5. If the fluid level is below the COLD checkband, add only enough fluid as necessaryto bring the level into the COLD band. It doesnot take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunityafter the transmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between 160°F to200°F (71°C to 93°C).

7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Hot Check ProcedureUse this procedure to check the transmission fluidlevel when the transmission fluid temperature isbetween 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).

The hot check is the most accurate method tocheck the fluid level. The hot check shouldbe performed at the first opportunity in order toverify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluidtemperature increases, so it is important toensure the transmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear ofthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

518

The dipstick handle hasthis graphic. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all theway, wait three seconds, and then pull it backout again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. Repeat the check procedure toverify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is within the HOTcrosshatch band on the dipstick. If the fluidlevel is not within the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature is between 160°Fand 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or drain fluidas necessary to bring the level into the HOTband. If the fluid level is low, add only enoughfluid to bring the level into the HOT band. Itdoes not take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

519

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice usingthe procedures described. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintaining proper fluidlevel. If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutesor longer to obtain an accurate reading because ofresidual fluid draining down the dipstick tube. Ifinconsistent readings persist, check thetransmission breather to be sure it is clean andnot clogged. If readings are still inconsistent,contact your dealer/retailer.

Engine CoolantIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 523.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

520

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer/retailer check yourcooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 644 for more information.

521

Checking CoolantThe coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 506 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at theFULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank.

If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and theLOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes onand stays on, it means you are low on enginecoolant. See “LOW COOLANT LEVEL” under DICWarnings and Messages on page 285.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. See CoolingSystem on page 527 for more information.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

522

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 506 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

You will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 264.

In addition, you will find ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessages in the Driver Information Center (DIC)on the instrument panel. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 285.

523

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.



See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode (V8 Engines Only) onpage 526 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode(V8 Engines Only) on page 526 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.

524

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineThe ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE orthe ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolant condition, canindicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer onpage 449.

If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE message with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turnit off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. If you are stopped in a traffic jam, apply thebrake, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift tothe highest gear while driving — DRIVE (D) orTHIRD (3).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

525

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle immediately.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehiclehas an engine-driven cooling fan, push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is abouttwice as fast as normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while you are parked.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehiclehas an electric cooling fan, idle the engine forfive minutes while you are parked.

If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode (V8 Engines Only)If an overheated engine condition exists andthe REDUCED ENGINE POWER messageis displayed, an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, you willnotice a loss in power and engine performance.This operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheatedengine protection operating mode, to avoidengine damage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) onpage 508.

526

Cooling SystemIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fan

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan can starteven when the engine is not running.To avoid injury, always keep hands,clothing, and tools away from any enginecooling fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.Check the coolant level after the system coolsdown. Some amount of coolant may be lost due tooverheating.

5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L and 6.0L Similar)

527

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak atthe pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode (V8 Engines Only) on page 526for information on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

528

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank for Gasoline EnginesIf your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “CoolingSystem” in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement forthe proper coolant fill procedure.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at or above theFULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 520 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

529

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolantsurge tank pressurecap when thecooling system,including the coolantsurge tankpressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

530

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until the enginecoolant temperature gage indicatesapproximately 195°F (90°C).By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut offand the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeatcoolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6.

531

Engine Fan NoiseIf your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan,when the clutch is engaged, the fan spinsfaster to provide more air to cool the engine. Inmost everyday driving conditions, the fan isspinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged.This improves fuel economy and reduces fannoise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fully engages, so youmay hear an increase in fan noise. This isnormal and should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making extra shifts. It ismerely the cooling system functioning properly.The fan will slow down when additional cooling isnot required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you startthe engine. It will go away as the fan clutchpartially disengages.

If your vehicle has electric cooling fans, you mayhear the fans spinning at low speed duringmost everyday driving. The fans may turn off if nocooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading,trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, orif you are operating your air conditioning system,the fans may change to high speed and youmay hear an increase in fan noise. This is normaland indicates that the cooling system isfunctioning properly. The fans will change to lowspeed when additional cooling is no longerrequired.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 forreservoir location.

532

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damageyour vehicle and the damages may not becovered by your warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 644.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen windshield washer fluid needs to be added,be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing.

533

Adding Washer FluidYour vehicle has a low washer fluid message inthe DIC that comes on when the washer fluidis low. The message is displayed for 15 secondsat the start of each ignition cycle. When theWASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, you will need to add washer fluid to thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 506for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

534

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 506 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you addfluid when the linings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. Add orremove brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check the brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633.

535

Checking Brake FluidThe brake fluid can be checked without taking offthe cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.

The fluid level should beabove MIN. If it is not,have the brakesystem checked to seeif there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 644.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

536

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 611.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and could haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 626.

537

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brake drums shouldbe removed and inspected each time the tiresare removed for rotation or changing. Drum brakeshave an inspection hole to inspect lining wearduring scheduled maintenance. When you havethe front brake pads replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, the brakesadjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakesmight not work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for yourvehicle, the balance between the front and rearbrakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

538

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery (orbatteries). When it is time for a new battery,see your dealer/retailer for one that has thereplacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 506 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 540 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

539

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has rundown, you may want to use another vehicle andsome jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine withtwo batteries, you should know before youbegin that, especially in cold weather, you maynot be able to get enough power from asingle battery in another vehicle to start yourdiesel engine. If your vehicle has morethan one battery, use the battery that is closerto the starter -- this will reduce electricalresistance. This is located on the passengerside, in the rear of the engine compartment.

540

3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause an unwanted ground connection.You would not be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding could damage theelectrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putthe automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

4. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparks andhelp save both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

5. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.The positive (+) terminal, is located under ared plastic cover at the positive batterypost. To uncover the positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.

541

The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud locatedon the right front passenger side of the engine,where the negative battery cable attaches.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 506

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

542

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

6. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

543

7. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal ofthe vehicle with thedead battery.

8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step.

10. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to the remote negative (−) terminal, onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

12. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8Land 6.0L similar)

544

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover, to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

545

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluidduring production. They are not filled to reacha certain level. When checking the fluid level onany axle, variations in the readings can be causedby factory fill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehiclehas just been driven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower than normal becausefluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area. Therefore, areading taken five minutes after the vehiclehas been driven will appear to have a lower fluidlevel than a vehicle that has been stationaryfor an hour or two. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to get a true reading.

How to Check Lubricant

2500HD with 6.0L

546

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

• For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Seriesapplications, the proper level is 0.04 inches to0.75 inches (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below thebottom of the filler hole, located on therear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach theproper level.

• For all 6.0L 1500 Series applications, theproper level is from 0.6 inches to 1.6 inches(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the fillerplug hole, located on the rear axle. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the proper level.

• For all 6.0L 2500HD Series applications, theproper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluidto reach the proper level.

• For all 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel 2500HD Seriesapplications and all 3500 Series applications,the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 0.8 inches(17 mm to 21 mm) below the bottom of the fillerplug hole, located on the rear axle. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the proper level.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 644.

All Other Series and Engines

547

Four-Wheel DriveLubricant checks in this section also apply tothese vehicles.

Transfer Case

When to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check transfer casefluid unless you suspect there is a leak, or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug

Electric Shift Transfer Case

548



To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you will need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

Manual Shift Transfer Case Active Transfer Case

549

When to Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to change the lubricant. SeeScheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) onpage 633.


Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

A: Fill PlugB: Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant:

• When the differential is cold, add enoughlubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm)to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.

• When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

550


Noise Control System

Tampering with Noise ControlSystem ProhibitedThe following information relates to compliancewith federal noise emission standards for vehicleswith a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ofmore than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information on maintainingthe noise control system to minimize degradationof the noise emission control system duringthe life of your vehicle. The noise control systemwarranty is given in your warranty booklet.

These standards apply only to vehicles sold in theUnited States.

Federal law prohibits the following acts or thecausing thereof:

1. The removal or rendering inoperative by anyperson, other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair or replacement, of anydevice or element of design incorporated intoany new vehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol, prior to its sale or delivery tothe ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after such device orelement of design has been removed orrendered inoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitutetampering are the acts listed below.

Insulation:• Removal of the noise shields or any

underhood insulation.

Engine:• Removal or rendering engine speed governor,

if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as toallow engine speed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

551

Fan and Drive:• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,

or rendering clutch inoperative.

• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle hasone.

Air Intake:• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.

• Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.

• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaustpipe clamps.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 557.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 504 for more information.

2. If you are replacing the bulb on the passengerside remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (GasolineEngines) on page 513 for more information.

3. Reach in and access the bulb sockets frominside the engine compartment.

552

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

5. Unplug the electrical connector from the oldbulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.

6. Replace it with a new bulb socket.7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new

bulb socket.8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the

headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise tosecure.

9. Close the hood.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) and Cargo LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws and lift off the lampassembly.

553

A. Cargo LampB. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb

(CHMSL)

2. Remove the CHMSL and Cargo bulbs byturning socket counterclockwise and pullingthe bulb straight out.

3. Install the CHMSL and Cargo bulbs bypushing the bulb straight in and turningclockwise.

4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten thescrews.

Pickup Box Identification andFender Marker LampsTo replace a pickup box identification or fendermarker lamp bulb:

1. Press the tab from the back to removethe lamp.

2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.

3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lampassembly.

4. Unplug the lamp.

5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into theassembly.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.

554

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate. Tailgate on page 129 formore information.

2. Remove the tworear lamp assemblyscrews near thetailgate latchstrikerpost and pullout the lampassembly.

3. Determine which of the following taillampassembly applies to your vehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.

6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turnthe socket clockwise into the taillampassembly.

7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.

A. Stoplamp/TurnSignal/Taillamp

B. Back-up LampC. Stoplamp/Turn

Signal/Taillamp

555

Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)

A. Backup LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:1. Remove the four screws.2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull

the old bulb straight out from the socket.4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it

clockwise, and press it in until it is tight.5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulbsocket.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keepingthe bulb straight as you pull it out.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thebulb socket.

556

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-up Lamp 3047Back-up Lamp* 1156Cargo Lamp and CenterHigh-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 912

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 4114KFender Marker Lamp W5WLLLicense Plate Lamp 168Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp* 3047

Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp 3047

Stoplamp/Turn SignalLamp/Taillamp* 1157

* Chassis Cab Models

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance(Gasoline Engine) on page 633.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side ofthe blade, and rotate the blade assemblyaway from the arm connector.

557

3. Install the new blade onto the arm connectorand make sure the grooved areas are fully setin the locked position.

For the proper type and size, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 646.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 428.


558


• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 567.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

20-Inch TiresIf your vehicle has the optional 20-inchP275/55R20 size tires, they are classified astouring tires and are designed for on road use. Thelow-profile, wide tread design is not recommendedfor “off-road” driving or commercial uses suchas snow plowing. See Off-Road Driving onpage 394 and Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment on page 435 for additional information.

559

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examplesof a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

560

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 581.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 567 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 428.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

561

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used in a dualconfiguration. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used as asingle. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.

562

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts ofa tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletters LT as the first two characters in the tiresize means a light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, asshown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tireillustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

563

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of atire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 428.

564

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 428.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

565

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 567 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 428.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 577.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 581.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 428.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 428.

566

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 428. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Do not forget to check the pressure of the sparetire, if your vehicle has one. See Spare Tireon page 606 for additional information.

567

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even whenthey’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loading information label,no further adjustment is necessary. If thepressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Dual Tire OperationWhen the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel,wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, checkthe wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving.For proper torque and wheel nut tighteninginformation, see Removing the Spare Tire andTools on page 588.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generallywears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wearmore evenly and last longer if you rotate thetires periodically, see Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 574. Also see Scheduled Maintenance(Gasoline Engine) on page 633.

568

{CAUTION:

If you operate your vehicle with a tire thatis badly underinflated, the tire canoverheat. An overheated tire can lose airsuddenly or catch fire. You or otherscould be injured. Be sure all tires(including the spare) are properly inflated.

See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 567, forinformation on proper tire inflation.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,except the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has theDriver Information Center (DIC), the driver may alsocheck tire pressure levels using the DIC.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster. If your vehicle has the DIC feature, amessage to check the pressure in a specific tirewill also appear on the DIC display. The lowtire pressure warning symbol on the instrumentpanel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning message on the DIC display will appear ateach ignition cycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.

569

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started and then turn off as youstart to drive the vehicle. This could be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures are getting low andneed to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

570

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning messageand low tire pressure light (telltale) will comeon each time the vehicle is started until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 567. For the location of the tire and loadinginformation label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 428.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 574 and Tires on page 558.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

571

Resetting the TPMS Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver’s side front tire, passengers sidefront tire, passengers side rear tire, and driver’sside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match all fourtire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlinedbelow:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays. If your vehicle does nothave the DIC buttons, press the trip odometerreset stem located on the instrument panelcluster until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays.

4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press theset/reset button. The horn will sound twice toindicate the TPMS receiver is ready, andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message willdisplay. If your vehicle does not have the DICbuttons, press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until the horn chirps twice and theTIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message isdisplayed.

572

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve capstem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressurefor five seconds, or until a horn chirpsounds. The horn chirp, which make take upto 30 seconds to sound, confirms that thesensor identification code has been matchedto this tire and wheel position. To decreaseair-pressure out of a tire you can use thepointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the horn chirp will soundtwo more times to signal the tire learningmode is no longer active. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

573

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 577and Wheel Replacement on page 582 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire, if your vehicle has one,is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try torotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheelwrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 586.

If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see DualTire Operation on page 568.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633.

574

If your vehicle has single rear wheels and thetread design for your front tires is the same as yourrear tires, use the rotation pattern shown herewhen rotating your tires.

If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the treaddesign for your front tires is the same as yourrear tires, always use one of the correct rotationpatterns shown here when rotating your tires.

575

If your vehicle has dualrear wheels and thetread design for the fronttires is different fromthe dual rear tires,always use the correctrotation patternshown here whenrotating your tires.

The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the insiderear tires become the outside rear tires.

When you install dual wheels, be sure the ventholes in the inner and outer wheels on each sideare lined up.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 428.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 626.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 586.

576

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, whichappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

577

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 560 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle mightnot handle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types could also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the samesize, brand, and type tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a different sizespare than the road tires (those originallyinstalled on your vehicle). When new, yourvehicle included a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overall diameteras your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,so it is all right to drive on it. Becausethis spare was developed for use on yourvehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.

578

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 569.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

579

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this could affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,traction control, and electronic stability control,the performance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 578 andAccessories and Modifications on page 494 foradditional information.

580

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

581

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment might need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels might need to berebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

582

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut isreplaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheelnut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For propertorque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications on page 626.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 586 for moreinformation.

583

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has dual wheels orP265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17size tires, do not use tire chains. They can



damage your vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust, or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

584

Notice: If your vehicle does not have dualwheels and has a tire size other thanP265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17, usetire chains only where legal and only whenyou must. Use chains that are the proper sizefor your tires. Install them on the tires ofthe rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires ofthe front axle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast or spinning thewheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

585

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 217 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).


586


3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear – not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire onthe other side, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof the wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

587

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

A. Wing NutRetaining Tool Kit

B. Tool KitC. Wheel Blocks

D. JackE. Wing Nut

Retaining WheelBlocks

A. Tool CoverB. Wing Nut


C. Wheel BlocksD. Tool KitE. JackF. Knob

Crew Cab

Regular Cab

588

A. Wing NutRetainingTool Kit

B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel BlocksD. JackE. Knob

For regular cab models, the equipment you willneed is behind the passenger’s seat. For extendedand crew cab models, the equipment is on theshelf behind the passenger’s side secondrow seat.

1. If there is a cover, move the seats forwardand turn the wing nut on the covercounterclockwise to remove it. For crew cabmodels, pull up the second row seat withthe loop at the base of the seat cushion toaccess the tools.

2. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise tolower the jack head to release the jack fromits holder.

3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer by turning the wing nutcounterclockwise.

4. Remove the wing nut used to retain thestorage bag and tools by turning itcounterclockwise.

You will use the jack handle extensions and thewheel wrench to remove the underbody-mountedspare tire.

Extended Cab

589

A. Spare Tire(Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist AssemblyC. Hoist CableD. Tire/Wheel

RetainerE. Hoist ShaftF. Hoist End of

Extension Tool

G. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

H. Wheel WrenchI. Jack Handle

ExtensionsJ. Spare Tire Lock

(If equipped)

1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumperand use the ignition key to remove the sparetire lock (J). To remove the spare tire lock,insert the ignition key turn and pull straight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and thetwo jack handle extensions (I) as shown.

590

3. Insert the hoist end(open end) (F) of theextension throughthe hole (G) inthe rear bumper.

Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F)connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbedsquare end of the extension is used to lowerthe spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwiseto lower the spare tire to the ground. Continueto turn the wheel wrench until the spare tirecan be pulled out from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 598.

5. Use the wheelwrench hook whichallows you topull the hoist cabletowards you toassist in reachingthe spare tire.

6. Tilt the retainer (D)at the end of thecable (C) when thetire has beenlowered, so it canbe pulled up throughthe wheel opening.

7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

591

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions toremove the flat tire and raise the vehicle.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jackhandle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).

1. Do a safety check before proceeding. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 586 for moreinformation.

2. If your vehicle haswheel nut caps,loosen themby turning the wheelwrenchcounterclockwise.

If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nutcaps, the wheel nut caps are designed tostay with the center cap after they areloosened. Remove the entire center cap.

592

If the wheel has a smooth center cap, placethe chisel end of the wheel wrench in theslot on the wheel, and gently pry it out.

3. Use the wheel wrench and turn itcounterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Donot remove the wheel nuts yet.

593

4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle(1500 Model vehicles), position the jack underthe bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame,behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the frontof the vehicle (all other models), positionthe jack on the frame behind the flat tire.

Front Position - 1500 Models Front Position - All Other Models

594

If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jackunder the rear axle between the spring anchorand the shock absorber bracket.If you have added a snow plow to the front ofyour vehicle, lower the snow plow fullybefore raising the vehicle.Make sure that the jack head is positioned sothat the rear axle is resting securely betweenthe grooves that are on the jack head.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

Rear Position – All Models

595

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for the sparetire to fit under the wheel well.

6. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. The



wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

8. Install the spare tire.

596

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel.

10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then usethe wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until thewheel is held against the hub.

11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 626for wheel nut torque specification.

597

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 626 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

12. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, youmust also reinstall either the center cap, orbolt-on hub cap, depending on what your vehicleis equipped with. For center caps, place thecap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seatsflush with the wheel. The cap only goes on one

way. Be sure to line up the tab on the center capwith the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-onhub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheelnuts and then tighten by hand. Then use thewheel wrench to tighten.

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly which has a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle. For the secondary latchto work, the spare tire must be installed withthe valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools on page 602.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

598

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see if thecable end isvisible. If the cableis not visible,proceed to Step 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise until youhear two clicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. Ifthe spare tire lowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tireand Tools on page 588.

5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheelwrench counterclockwise until approximately6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,with the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottomedge of the jack (A)on the wheelblocks (B),separating them sothat the jack isbalanced securely.

599

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicle toward thefront of the rear bumper.

9. Position the center lift point of the jack underthe center of the spare tire.

10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the end fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tirestops moving upward and is held firmly inplace so that the secondary latch has releasedand the spare tire is balancing on the jack.

12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

600

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. Ifthe spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from under the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack with the other hand.

14. Use one hand to push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out from under thespare tire with the other hand. If the spare tireis hanging from the cable, insert the hoistend of the extension, and wheel wrench intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper andturn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare tire the rest of the way.

15. Tilt the tire retainerat the end of thecable and pullit through the wheelopening. Pull thetire out fromunder the vehicle.

16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft holein the bumper clockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hanging underthe vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare orflat tire using the hoist assembly until it hasbeen replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 592.

601

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flattire under your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time or with the valve stem pointingup can damage the wheel. Always stow thewheel with the valve stem pointing down andhave the wheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier.

Use the following art and text to assist you:

A. Spare Tire(Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist AssemblyC. Hoist CableD. Tire/Wheel

RetainerE. Hoist Shaft

F. Hoist End ofExtension Tool

G. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

H. Wheel WrenchI. Jack Handle

ExtensionsJ. Spare Tire Lock

(If Equipped)

602

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of thevehicle with the valve stem pointed down,and to the rear.

2. Tilt the retainerdownward andthrough the wheelopening. Makesure the retainer isfully seatedacross the undersideof the wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) andextensions (I) together.

4. Insert the hoistend (F) through thehole (G) in therear bumper andonto the hoistshaft (E).

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure theretainer (D) is seated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear two clicks or feel itskip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.

603

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehiclehas one.

To store the jack and jack tools, do the following:



D. JackE. Wing Nut


Crew Cab

604

A. Tool CoverB. Wing Nut

RetainingWheel Blocks

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Tool KitE. JackF. Wing Nut

Retaining Jack



D. JackE. Wing Nut

Retaining Jack

1. Put the tools in the tool bag and place them inthe retaining bracket.If your vehicle has a cover replace the cover.

2. Tighten down the wing nut.

Regular Cab Extended Cab

605

3. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack togetherwith the wing nut and retaining hook.If you have the Regular Cab, the wheel blocksmust be placed straight up and down on thetop of the jack.

4. Position the jack in the mounting bracket.Position the holes in the base of the jackonto the pin in the mounting bracket.

5. Return them to their original location in thevehicle. For more information, refer toRemoving the Spare Tire and Tools onpage 588 for more information.

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated sparetire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 567 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 428 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction onhow to remove, install or store a spare tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tireon page 592 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 602.

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the different size spare tire is installed onyour vehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flat tire repairedand/or replaced. You could damage yourvehicle, and the repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when the different size sparetire is installed on your vehicle.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tirethan the road tires originally installed on yourvehicle. This spare tire was developed for use onyour vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. Ifyour vehicle has four-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replacedas soon as you can and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, the spare tire will be availablein case you need it again.

606

Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire andits wheel together. If your vehicle has a sparetire that does not match your vehicle’s original roadtires and wheels in size and type, do not includethe spare in the tire rotation.

Appearance CareCleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

607

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

608

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on leather.

609

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 644.

610

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 615. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 611.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 615.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

611

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glasscleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

612

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust. Alwayswash your vehicle’s chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

613

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

614

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

615

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

616

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 110.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. If the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and thencloses after a cool down period, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

617

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without, like the radioor cigarette lighter, and use its fuse if it is thecorrect amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panelfuse block access dooris located on thedriver’s side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.

618

Fuses UsageREAR SEAT Rear SeatsAUX PWR2 Rear Accessory Power OutletSWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls BacklightDDM Driver Door Module

CTSY Dome Lamps, Driver’s Side TurnSignal

LT STOP TRN Driver Side Turn Signal, StoplampDIM Instrument Panel Back Lighting

RT STOP TRN Passenger Side Turn Signal,Stoplamp

Fuses Usage

PDM Passenger Door Module, UniversalHome Remote System

UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)

STOP LAMPS Stoplamps, Center-High MountedStoplamp

REAR HVAC Rear Climate ControlsPWR MIR Power MirrorBCM Body Control Module (BCM)AUX PWR Accessory Power OutletsIS LAMPS Interior LampsUNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking AssistLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)REAR WPR Not UsedCOOLEDSEATS Not Used

DSM Driver Seat Module, RemoteKeyless Entry System

DRV UNLCK Driver’s Power Door Lock(Unlock Feature)

619

Circuit Breaker Usage

LT DR Driver’s Side Power Window CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DR Driver’s Door Harness ConnectionBODY Harness ConnectorBODY Harness Connector

Center Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe center instrument panel fuse block islocated underneath the instrument panel, to theleft of the steering column.

Top View


BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3

HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1

620


BRAKECLUTCH Brake Clutch Harness Connector

SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option UpfitterHarness Connector

Circuit Breaker Usage

CB1 Passenger’s Side Power WindowCircuit Breaker

CB2 Passenger’s Seat Circuit BreakerCB3 Driver’s Seat Circuit BreakerCB4 Not Used

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to accessthe fuse block.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fusebetween your thumb and index finger and pullstraight out.

621

Fuses Usage1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp2 Not Used

3Electronic Stability SuspensionControl, Automatic Level ControlExhaust

Fuses Usage4 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp5 Engine Controls

6 Engine Control Module, ThrottleControl

7 Trailer Brake Controller

622

Fuses Usage8 Front Washer9 Oxygen Sensors

10 Anti-lock Brakes System 211 Trailer Back-up Lamps12 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp13 Engine Control Module (Battery)

14 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (RightSide)

15 Transmission Control Module(Battery)

16 Vehicle Back-up Lamps

17 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

18 Air Conditioning Compressor19 Oxygen Sensors20 Transmission Controls (Ignition)

Fuses Usage21 Fuel Pump22 Fuel System Control Module23 Not Used24 Not Used

25 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (LeftSide)

26 Trailer Park Lamps27 Driver’s Side Park Lamps28 Passenger’s Side Park Lamps29 Fog Lamps30 Horn

31 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

32 Daytime Running Lamps33 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp34 Not Used

623

Fuses Usage35 Sunroof

36 Key Ignition System, Theft DeterrentSystem

37 Windshield Wiper38 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)39 Electric Adjustable Pedals40 Climate Controls (Battery)41 Airbag System (Ignition)42 Amplifier43 Audio System

44 Miscellaneous (Ignition), CruiseControl

45 Tailgate Open/Close Assist46 Airbag System (Battery)

47 OnStar®, Rear Seat EntertainmentDisplay

Fuses Usage48 Instrument Panel Cluster49 Power Take-Off

50 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),Compass-Temperature Mirror

51 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL)

52 Rear Defogger53 Heated Mirrors54 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)

55 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

56 Automatic Level Control CompressorRelay, SEO Upfitter Usage

57 Climate Controls (Ignition)

58 Engine Control Module, SecondaryFuel Pump (Ignition)

624

J-Case Fuses Usage59 Cooling Fan 160 Automatic Level Control Compressor61 Heavy Duty Anti-lock Brake System62 Cooling Fan 263 Anti-lock Brake System 164 Starter65 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)66 Left Bussed Electrical Center 167 Not Used68 Heated Windshield Washer System69 Four-Wheel Drive System

70Stud 1 (Trailer Connector BatteryPower) (Optional - 40A FuseRequired)

71 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 172 Climate Control Blower73 Tailgate Open/Close Assist74 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2

Relays UsageFAN HI Cooling Fan High SpeedFAN LO Cooling Fan Low SpeedENG EXH VLV Not UsedFAN CNTRL Cooling Fan ControlHDLP LO/HID Low-Beam HeadlampFOG LAMP Front Fog LampsA/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorSTRTR StarterPWR/TRN PowertrainFUEL PMP Fuel PumpPRK LAMP Parking LampsREAR DEFOG Rear DefoggerRUN/CRANK Switched Power

625

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 644 for more information.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System4.3L V6 ** 16.5 qt 15.6 L4.8L V8 ** 16.9 qt 16.0 L5.3L V8 ** 16.9 qt 16.0 L6.0L V8 * 16.4 qt 15.5 L6.0L V8 ** 16.8 qt 15.9 L

* 2500, 3500 series** 1500 seriesEngine Oil with Filter

4.3L V6 4.5 qt 4.3 L4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L

626

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricFuel Tank

1500 Series Standard and Short Box 26.0 gal 98.0 L1500 Series Long Box 34.0 gal 128.7 L2500 Series and 3500 Series 34.0 gal 128.7 L3500 Series Chassis Cab 50.0 gal 189.0 L3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 27.0 gal 102.0 L3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank 23.0 gal (if equipped) 87.0 L

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E ElectronicTransmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L70-E Super DutyTransmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 6.0 qt 5.7 LAuto 6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.3 qt 6.0 LAuto 6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Transfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 LWheel Nut Torque 140 ft lb 190 YAfter refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operatingrange.

627

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 X Automatic 0.060 in (1.52 mm)

4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 Iron, Flexible Fuel withActive Fuel Management™,

SFI, OHV0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 Aluminum FlexibleFuel with Active FuelManagement™, SFI

3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 Aluminum with ActiveFuel Management™ M Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 Iron with Active FuelManagement™ J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

6.0L V8 K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

6.0L V8 with Active FuelManagement™ Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

628

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 630Introduction ............................................... 630Maintenance Requirements ........................ 630Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 630Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 631Scheduled Maintenance

(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 633Additional Required Services

(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 636Maintenance Footnotes

(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 638

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 640At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles

(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ..................... 641At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 641At Least Once a Month ............................. 641At Least Once a Year ............................... 642Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 644Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 646Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 647Maintenance Record .................................. 648

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

629

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionThis maintenance section applies to vehicles witha gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see the maintenance schedule sectionin the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

Important: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tireinflation can increase the level of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our environment, andto keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure tomaintain your vehicle properly.

630

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do notknow exactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people usetheir vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on howto keep your vehicle in good condition, seeyour GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 394.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 497.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance (GasolineEngine) on page 633 should be performedwhen indicated. See Additional Required Services(Gasoline Engine) on page 636 and MaintenanceFootnotes (Gasoline Engine) on page 638 forfurther information.

631

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 495.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 669.

Owner Checks and Services on page 640 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 644 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 646.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the useof genuine GM parts.

632

Scheduled Maintenance (GasolineEngine)This maintenance section applies to vehicles witha gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see the maintenance schedule sectionin the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 511 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

633

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come onat all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508.Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 511. An EmissionControl Service.

• •

Allison Transmission® only: Replace external transmission filter at the firstmaintenance service performed on the vehicle.

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 513.See footnote (p).

•

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 574 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 641.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

634

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

Inspect shields, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only. See footnote (n). •

635

Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine)This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine,see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Vehicles without a filter restrictionindicator: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Gasoline Engines) on page 513.

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Four-wheel drive only: Change transfercase fluid (extreme duty service).See footnotes (g) (l) and (m).

• • • • • •

636

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Four-wheel drive only: Changetransfer case fluid (normal service).See footnotes (g) and (m).

• • •

Inspect evaporative control system.An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (k).

• • •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (q).

•

637

Maintenance Footnotes (GasolineEngine)This maintenance section applies to vehicles witha gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see the maintenance schedule section inthe DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge thatall recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, steeringlinkage, transmission shift linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on2500/3500 series vehicles require lubrication butshould not be lubricated unless their temperature is10°F (−12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged.Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles aremaintenance-free. Vehicles used under severecommercial operating conditions require lubricationon a regular basis every 3,000 miles (5 000 km).

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoesfor wear or cracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parkingbrake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Visually check constant velocity joints, rubberboots, and axle seals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

638

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replace wiper bladesthat are worn or damaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 557 and Windshieldand Wiper Blades on page 612 for moreinformation.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body doorhinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch,pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinges,tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot points,latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and foldingseat hardware. More frequent lubrication maybe required when exposed to a corrosive

environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to be sure vent hoseis unobstructed, clear, and free of debris.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter if the vehicle Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you shouldhave your dealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 520 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

639

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, andcondition. Check that the purge valve, if the vehiclehas one, works properly. Replace as needed.

(l) Extreme Duty Service: Change transfer casefluid if the vehicle is mainly driven off-road infour-wheel drive, or is used for heavy trailer towing.Farming, mining, forestry, and Department ofNatural Resources (DNR) vehicles meet thisdefinition.

(m) During any maintenance, if a power washer isused to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to not directly spray thetransfer case output seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals and contaminate thetransfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer case andshould be replaced.

(n) Vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWRabove 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shieldsfor damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as

required. This is a Noise Emission ControlService. Applicable to vehicles sold in theUnited States and recommended forvehicles sold in Canada.

(p) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter or change indicator (if equipped)at each engine oil change.

(q) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 644.

640

At the First 100, 1,000 and6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and10 000 km)Check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque,see Capacities and Specifications on page 626.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)on page 508 for further details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the properlevel. Failure to keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage to the enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 520 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 567. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 586.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 574.

641

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 169.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 169.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

642

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out onlyin LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there is



room in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

643

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles witha gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see the maintenance schedule section inthe DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil (GasolineEngine) on page 508.


Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 520.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Floor ShiftLinkage

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

644


Front Axle(1500 Series)

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021671,in Canada 89021672).

Front Axle(1500 HD,

2500, 2500 HD,and 3500Series)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer Case(Four-Wheel

Drive)DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Front AxlePropshaftSpline or

One-PiecePropshaft

Spline(Two-WheelDrive with4-Speed

Auto. Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,in Canada 10953511) or lubricantmeeting requirements ofGM 9985830.


Rear DrivelineCenter Spline

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Body DoorHinge Pins,

Tailgate Hingeand Linkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel Door

Hinge


Tailgate HandlePivot Points,

Hinges, LatchBolt, andLinkage


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

645

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for moreinformation.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

High Capacity 15908915 A3085C

Standard 15908916 A3086C*

Oil Filter

4.3L V6 25010792 PF47

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 89017883 41-932

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15930910 —

*A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.

646

Engine Drive Belt Routing

(A) Air Conditioning CompressorV6 Engines

V8 Engines

647

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 630. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 640 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

648

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



649

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



650

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 652Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 652Online Owner Center ................................. 655Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 656Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 656GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 657Roadside Assistance Program ................... 658Courtesy Transportation ............................. 661Collision Damage Repair ........................... 664

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 667Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 667

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government ............................ 668

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors ...................................... 668

Service Publications OrderingInformation ............................................. 669

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 670Event Data Recorders ............................... 671OnStar ...................................................... 672Navigation System ..................................... 672Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ................................ 672

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

651

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally,any concerns with the sales transaction orthe operation of your vehicle will be resolvedby your dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

652

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

653

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

654

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

655

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

656

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

657

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872);(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.

Services ProvidedThe following services are provided in the U.S. andCanada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to amaximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada,service to provide diesel may be restricted.For safety reasons, propane and otheralternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will becovered at no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle. A remote unlock maybe available if you have an active OnStar®

subscription. To ensure security, the drivermust present personal identification beforelock-out service is provided. In Canada, thevehicle registration is also required.

658

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest dealershipfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance is provided when the vehicleis mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered atno charge if the vehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.Please allow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests will belimited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from the original point ofdeparture, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

659

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Theremay be times, when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance. Your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may becovered. However, any cost for parts and laborfor non-warranty repairs are the responsibilityof the driver.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessivein frequency or type of occurrence.

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

660

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or includedin the coverage provided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motorsof Canada Limited reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue the RoadsideAssistance program at any time withoutnotification.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, weand our participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

661

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do soas early in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenienceby providing several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participating dealerscan provide you with shuttle service to get you toyour destination with minimal interruption of yourdaily schedule. This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonable time and distanceparameters for the dealer’s area.

662

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as “shuttleservice”, the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you witha courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicleis kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and

may include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change or discontinueCourtesy Transportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

663

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts canhelp maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total losses inprior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections ofthe vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain

your vehicle’s originally designed appearance andsafety performance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such parts are notcovered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

664

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to moveit by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 658 for moreinformation.

665

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general descriptionof the damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance companyfrom the scene of the accident. They will walkyou through the information they will need.If they ask for a police report, phone or goto the police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select adealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, make sure youare comfortable with them. Remember,you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

666

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased youmay be obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s

collision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) immediately, in additionto notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation. If it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer/retailer,or General Motors.

667

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can obtain information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors of Canada Limited. Call themat 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, please notifyGeneral Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

668

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins’ give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist in the diagnosisand service of your vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual includes the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

669

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions forairbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crashand, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle. Thesemodules may store data to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumptionor average speed. These modules may also retainthe owner’s personal preferences, such as radiopre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

670

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations, such asan air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time, typically30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understandingof the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata is recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have accessto the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, ifthe vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense oflitigation through the discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM research needs or maybe made available to others for research purposes,where a need is shown and the data is not tied toa specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

671

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 185 in this manual for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoring andignition system security, as well as in connectionwith conveniences such as key fobs for remotedoor locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicletransmitters for garage door openers. RFIDtechnology in GM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with any other GMsystem containing personal information.

672

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 494Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ..... 435Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ..................................................... 111Additives, Fuel ............................................ 498Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 617Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 143Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 513Air Conditioning ......................... 240, 243, 244Airbag

Off Light .................................................. 256Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 258Readiness Light ....................................... 256

Airbag System ............................................... 89What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 98When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 95Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 92

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 111Airbag Off Switch ..................................... 100How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 98Passenger Sensing System ...................... 103Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 110

Airbag Systems (cont.)What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 97

AM-FM Radio .............................................. 310Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 375Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 375Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 383Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ......... 263Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 613Care of Safety Belts ................................ 610Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 615Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 611Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 607Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 608Finish Care .............................................. 611Finish Damage ......................................... 614Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 610Leather .................................................... 609Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 614Tires ........................................................ 614Underbody Maintenance ........................... 614Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 615Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 611Weatherstrips ........................................... 610Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 612

673

Appearance Care (cont.)Ashtray ....................................................... 239Audio System .............................................. 306

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 310Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 372Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 375Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 374Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 375Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................. 359Radio with CD ................................ 312, 318Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 370Setting the Time ...................................... 307Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 372Understanding Radio Reception ............... 373XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 375

Audio System(s)Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 328

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 229Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 516Operation ................................................. 146

Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch .......... 231

BBattery ........................................................ 539

Electric Power Management ..................... 233Run-Down Protection ............................... 234

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 418Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 385Brakes ........................................................ 535

System Warning Light .............................. 262Braking ....................................................... 382Braking in Emergencies ............................... 385Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 139Bulb Replacement ....................................... 552

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)and Cargo Lamp .................................. 553

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 552Headlamps ............................................... 552License Plate Lamps ................................ 556Pickup Box Identification and Fender

Marker Lamps ...................................... 554Replacement Bulbs .................................. 557Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 555Buying New Tires ........................................ 578

674

CCalibration .......................................... 175, 178California Fuel ............................................. 497California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 495Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 626Carbon Monoxide .............. 129, 173, 422, 449Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 610Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 375Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 374

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 233Cargo Management System ........................ 204CD, MP3 ............................................ 345, 351Center Console Storage Area ...................... 202Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ........................................ 37, 38Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

and Cargo Lamp ...................................... 553Center Seat .................................................. 19Chains, Tire ................................................. 584Charging System Light ................................ 260Check

Engine Light ............................................ 266Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 504Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 615

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 53Infants and Young Children ........................ 49Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 60Older Children ........................................... 46Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 72Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 74Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .......... 75, 81, 85Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 58

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 239Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 613Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 611Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 608Finish Care .............................................. 611Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 607Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 610Leather .................................................... 609Tires ........................................................ 614Underbody Maintenance ........................... 614Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 611Weatherstrips ........................................... 610Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 612

675

Cleaning (cont.)Climate Control System ...................... 240, 243

Dual Automatic ......................................... 244Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 251

Clock .......................................................... 307Collision Damage Repair ............................. 664Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 42Compass ............................................ 175, 178Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 135Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 382Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 264Heater, Engine ......................................... 144Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 523

Cooling System ........................................... 527Cruise Control ............................................. 224Cruise Control Light .................................... 271Cupholder(s) ................................................ 201Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 661Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 656Customer Assistance Offices .................... 656Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 652GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 657Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 668

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 668Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 667Roadside Assistance Program .................. 658Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 669

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 228Defensive Driving ........................................ 378Delayed Locking .......................................... 126Disc, MP3 .......................................... 345, 351Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 495Dome Lamp Override .................................. 232Dome Lamps ............................................... 232Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 126Locks ....................................................... 125Power Door Locks ................................... 126Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 126Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 127Rear Doors .............................................. 128

676

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 28

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 273DIC Operation and Displays ............ 274, 281DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 295DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 411City .......................................................... 416Defensive ................................................. 378Drunken ................................................... 379Freeway ................................................... 417Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 420In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 412Off-Road .................................................. 394Recovery Hooks ....................................... 427Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 426Winter ...................................................... 422

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 244Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 568DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 359

EEDR ............................................................ 670Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 617Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 620Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 618Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 618Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 617Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 621Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 617

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 513Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 266Coolant .................................................... 520Coolant Heater ......................................... 144Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 264Drive Belt Routing .................................... 647Engine Compartment Overview ................ 506Exhaust ................................................... 173Fan Noise ................................................ 532Oil ........................................................... 508Oil Life System ........................................ 511Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 526Overheating ............................................. 523Running While Parked ............................. 174Starting .................................................... 141

677

Entry Lighting .............................................. 232Event Data Recorders ................................. 671Exit Lighting ................................................ 232Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 45Exterior Lamps ............................................ 227

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 513Finish Damage ............................................ 614Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 375Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 217Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 220Flat Tire ...................................................... 585Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 586Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 602Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 516Power Steering ........................................ 532Windshield Washer .................................. 533

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 230

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 271Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 154, 548Four-Wheel-Drive Light ................................ 271Front Axle ................................................... 550

Fuel ............................................................ 496Additives .................................................. 498California Fuel .......................................... 497E85 (85% Ethanol) ................................... 499Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 503Filling Your Tank ...................................... 500Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 500Gage ....................................................... 272Gasoline Octane ...................................... 497Gasoline Specifications ............................ 497Low Warning Light ................................... 273

FusesCenter Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 620Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 618Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 618Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 621Windshield Wiper ..................................... 617

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 264Fuel ......................................................... 272Oil Pressure ............................................. 269Speedometer ........................................... 254Tachometer .............................................. 254Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 261

678

Garage Door Opener ................................... 189Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 497Specifications ........................................... 497

Glove Box ................................................... 201GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 657

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 217Head Restraints ............................................ 18Headlamps .................................................. 552

Bulb Replacement .................................... 552Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 228Exterior Lamps ......................................... 227Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 220Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 552High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 220On Reminder ........................................... 228Pickup Box Identification and Fender

Marker Lamps ...................................... 554Heated Seats ................................................ 12Heater ................................................ 240, 243Heater ......................................................... 244Highbeam On Light ..................................... 271Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 419Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 420

HoodChecking Things Under ............................ 504Release ................................................... 504

Horn ............................................................ 217How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 27

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 140Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 49Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 567Instrument Panel

Overview ......................................... 212, 215Storage Area ............................................ 202

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 231Cluster ..................................................... 253

JJump Starting .............................................. 540

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 118Keys ........................................................... 117

679

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 560Lamps

Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................. 231Cargo ...................................................... 233Dome ....................................................... 232Dome Lamp Override ............................... 232Puddle ..................................................... 230Reading ................................................... 232

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 60

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 19License Plate Lamps ................................... 556Light

Airbag Off ................................................ 256Airbag Readiness ..................................... 256Antilock Brake System Warning ................ 263Brake System Warning ............................. 262Charging System ..................................... 260Cruise Control .......................................... 271Fog Lamp ................................................ 271Four-Wheel-Drive ..................................... 271Highbeam On .......................................... 271Low Fuel Warning .................................... 273Malfunction Indicator ................................ 266Oil Pressure ............................................. 270

Light (cont.)Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 258Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 255Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 255Security ................................................... 270StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 264Tire Pressure ........................................... 265Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 272

LightingEntry ........................................................ 232Exit .......................................................... 232

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 227Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 220High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 220On Reminder ........................................... 228

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 428Locking Rear Axle ....................................... 385Lockout Protection ....................................... 128Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 126Door ........................................................ 125Lockout Protection ................................... 128Power Door ............................................. 126Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 126Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 127

Loss of Control ........................................... 393

680

Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 273Luggage Carrier .......................................... 203Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 11Power Controls .......................................... 11

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 636At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 641At Least Once a Month ............................ 641At Least Once a Year .............................. 642At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles

(160, 1 600 and 10 000km) .................. 641Introduction .............................................. 630Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 638Maintenance Record ................................ 648Maintenance Requirements ...................... 630Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 646Owner Checks and Services .................... 640Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 644Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 633Using ....................................................... 631Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 630

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 266Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11

Manual Seats .................................................. 9Manual Windows ......................................... 131Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 13Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass and Temperature Display ....... 178

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................. 175

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 175Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 179Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 182Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 181Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 180

MP3 ................................................... 345, 351MyGMLink.com ............................................ 655

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 672Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................... 359New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 139Noise Control System, Tampering ................ 551Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 646

681

OOdometer .................................................... 254Odometer, Trip ............................................ 254Off-Road Driving .......................................... 394Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 391Oil

Engine ..................................................... 508Pressure Gage ......................................... 269Pressure Light .......................................... 270

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 511Older Children, Restraints ............................. 46Online Owner Center ................................... 655OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 672OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 185Operation, Universal Home Remote

System ............................................ 190, 194Other Warning Devices ................................ 217Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 251Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 238Outside

Manual Mirrors ......................................... 179Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 182Power Mirrors .......................................... 181Trailer-Tow Mirrors ................................... 180

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 526

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 640Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 614Park Aid ...................................................... 234Park Brake .................................................. 169Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 170Shifting Out of ......................................... 172

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 234Over Things That Burn ............................ 172

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 258Passenger Sensing System ......................... 103Passing ....................................................... 391PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 137PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 137Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .............. 443Power

Door Locks .............................................. 126Electrical System ..................................... 617Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 141

682

Power (cont.)Seat .......................................................... 10Sliding Rear Window ................................ 134Steering Fluid .......................................... 532Windows .................................................. 132

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 45Privacy ........................................................ 670

Event Data Recorders .............................. 671Navigation System ................................... 672OnStar ..................................................... 672Radio Frequency Identification .................. 672

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 126Puddle Lamps ............................................. 230

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 26

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 672Radios ........................................................ 306

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 310Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 375Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 374Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 359

Radios (cont.)Radio with CD ................................ 312, 318Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 328Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 370Setting the Time ...................................... 307Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 372Understanding Reception ......................... 373

Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 222Reading Lamps ........................................... 232Rear Axle .................................................... 546

Locking .................................................... 385Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 127Rear Doors ................................................. 128Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 42Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 204Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 370Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 359Rear Seat Operation .............................. 20, 21Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 39Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display .......... 178Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 175

Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 175Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 644

683

Recovery Hooks .......................................... 427Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 443Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 118Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 119Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 592Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 588Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 557Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 668General Motors ........................................ 668United States Government ....................... 667

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ............... 112Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................ 113Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 141Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 37Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 658Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 426Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 647Running the Engine While Parked ............... 174

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 255Pretensioners ............................................. 45Reminder Light ........................................ 255

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 610Center Front Passenger Position ......... 37, 38Driver Position ........................................... 28How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 27Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ....................................................... 26Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 42Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 39Right Front Passenger Position .................. 37Safety Belt Extender .................................. 45Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 36Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 22Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 35

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 633Seatback Latches .......................................... 19Seats

Center Seat ............................................... 19Head Restraints ......................................... 18Heated Seats ............................................. 12Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 13

684

Seats (cont.)Power Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation ........................... 20, 21Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 15Seatback Latches ...................................... 19

Secondary Latch System ............................. 598Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ......................... 74Rear Seat Position ..................................... 72Right Front Seat Position ............. 75, 81, 85

Security Light .............................................. 270Service ........................................................ 494

Accessories and Modifications .................. 494Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 496California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 495Doing Your Own Work ............................. 495Engine Soon Light ................................... 266Publications Ordering Information ............. 669

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 110Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 614Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 170Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 172Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 35Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 219Sliding Rear Window, Power ....................... 134

Snow Plow .................................................. 435Spare Tire ................................................... 606

Installing .................................................. 592Removing ................................................ 588Storing ..................................................... 602

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 626Speedometer ............................................... 254StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 385StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 264Starting Your Engine ................................... 141Steering ...................................................... 389Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 372Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 218Storage Areas ............................................. 201

Cargo Management System ..................... 204Center Console Storage Area ................... 202Cupholder(s) ............................................ 201Glove Box ................................................ 201Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 202Luggage Carrier ....................................... 203Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 204

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 426Sun Visors .................................................. 135Sunroof ....................................................... 205System Identification, Universal Home

Remote System ....................................... 188

685

TTachometer ................................................. 254Tailgate ....................................................... 129Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 555

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 372Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 135

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 135PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 137PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 137

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 218Time, Setting ............................................... 307Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 265Tires ........................................................... 558

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels, Cleaning .................................. 613

Buying New Tires ..................................... 578Chains ..................................................... 584Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 586Cleaning .................................................. 614Different Size ........................................... 580

Tires (cont.)Dual Tire Operation .................................. 568If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 585Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 567Inspection and Rotation ............................ 574Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 592Pressure Monitor System ......................... 569Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 592Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 588Secondary Latch System ......................... 598Spare Tire ................................................ 606Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 602Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 560Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 564Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 581Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 582Wheel Replacement ................................. 582When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 577

Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 152Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 272Towing

Recreational Vehicle ................................. 443Towing a Trailer ....................................... 449Your Vehicle ............................................. 443

686

TractionStabiliTrak® System ................................. 385

TrailerRecommendations .................................... 490

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 516

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 146Trip Odometer ............................................. 254Truck-Camper Loading Information .............. 439Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 219Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 218

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 234Understanding Radio Reception ................... 373Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 581Universal Home Remote System ................. 189

Operation ........................................ 190, 194System Identification ................................ 188

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 382Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 428Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 295Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 670Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 616Service Parts Identification Label .............. 617

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 251Visors .......................................................... 135Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 261

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 252Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 217Other Warning Devices ............................ 217Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

687

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 582Different Size ........................................... 580Replacement ............................................ 582

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 58Windows ..................................................... 131

Manual ..................................................... 131Power ...................................................... 132Sliding Rear ............................................. 134

WindshieldRainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 222Washer .................................................... 223Washer Fluid ........................................... 533Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 557Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 612Wiper Fuses ............................................ 617Wipers ..................................................... 221

Winter Driving ............................................. 422

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 357XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 375

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 630

688

2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M - General … Systems ..... 135 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 139 Mirrors ..... 175 ... 2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

Documents